Bpc440 en Col96 Fv Inst a4

BPC440 SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation - Consolidation SAP BusinessObjects - Financial Performance Management

Date Training Center Instructors Education Website

Instructor Handbook Course Version: 96 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) Material Number: 50106153 Owner: Tim Soper (I802255)

An SAP Compass course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Copyright Copyright © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.

Trademarks •

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

•

IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

•

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

•

INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.

•

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

•

Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

•

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

•

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

•

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.

•

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g201110239246

About This Handbook This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used. Type Style

Description

Example text

Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options. Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal and external.

2011

Example text

Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT

Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text

Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program.

Example text

Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.

Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.

© 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

iii

About This Handbook

BPC440

Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon

Meaning For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point Exception or caution Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor’s presentation.

iv


2011

Contents Course Overview ......................................................... vii Course Goals ...........................................................vii Course Objectives ..................................................... ix

Unit 1: Introduction........................................................ 1 Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components ...3 Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in ............... 12 Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation ...................................................... 56 Using the IFRS Starter Kit ........................................... 67

Unit 2: Creating the Structures ....................................... 75 Setting up Environments and Master Data ........................ 77 Creating Models for Consolidation ................................ 110 Creating Consolidation Logic ......................................136

Unit 3: Preparing for Elimination .................................... 167 Importing Flat File and InfoCube Data ............................169 Configuring Balance Carryforward.................................208 Reclassifying Data ...................................................226 Using Consolidation Central ........................................245 Setting up Journals ..................................................256 Translating Local Currency .........................................298

Unit 4: Configuring Eliminations .................................... 329 Reviewing Ownership Terms and Concepts......................331 Using the Ownership Manager .....................................339 Eliminating Ownership - Purchase Method .......................379 Eliminating Ownership - Equity and Proportional Methods.....414 Matching Intercompany ............................................456 Eliminating Intercompany Receivables and Payables ..........480 Setting up Managerial Elimination (US)...........................503

Unit 5: Creating Controls and Business Process Flows....... 521 Using the Controls Monitor and Validating Data .................522 Creating Consolidation Business Process Flows ................559

Glossary................................................................... 611

2011


v

Contents

BPC440

Index ....................................................................... 613

vi


2011

Course Overview SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP NetWeaver is a robust planning and consolidation application that can meet all of your budgeting, planning, consolidation, and reporting requirements. It supports the full array of top-down and bottom-up financial and operational planning needs as well as consolidation processes necessary to ensure the smoothest, most timely financial close possible — all through a single system. As a result, you gain the confidence to meet increasingly stringent regulations and reporting requirements across the globe.

Target Audience This course is intended for the following audiences: •

Project team members and consultants with a basic knowledge of Business Warehouse, SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, and consolidation within accounting.

Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge •

Practical knowledge of consolidation accounting

Recommended Knowledge • •

BPC420 or BPC430 BW310

Course Duration Details

2011

Unit 1: Introduction Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Exercise 1: Report and Plan in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-In Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Using the IFRS Starter Kit

35 Minutes 25 Minutes

Unit 2: Creating the Structures Setting up Environments and Master Data Exercise 2: Maintain Dimensions for Consolidation Creating Models for Consolidation

65 Minutes 40 Minutes 35 Minutes



vii

Course Overview

BPC440

Exercise 3: Create Consolidation Models Creating Consolidation Logic Exercise 4: Create Consolidation Logic Files Exercise 5: Create Balancing Logic Unit 3: Preparing for Elimination Importing Flat File and InfoCube Data Exercise 6: Import Flat File Data Exercise 7: Import Data from a BW InfoCube Configuring Balance Carryforward Exercise 8: Configure Balance Carryforward Business Rules Reclassifying Data Exercise 9: Configure Reclassification Business Rules Using Consolidation Central Setting up Journals Exercise 10: Configure and Use Journal Templates Translating Local Currency Exercise 11: Configure Currency Translation Unit 4: Configuring Eliminations Reviewing Ownership Terms and Concepts Using the Ownership Manager Exercise 12: Create Investment Data in the Ownership Manager Eliminating Ownership - Purchase Method Exercise 13: Configure Business Rules for the Purchase Method Eliminating Ownership - Equity and Proportional Methods Exercise 14: Create the Equity Elimination Business Rules Exercise 15: Create the Proportional Business Rules Matching Intercompany Exercise 16: Configure Intercompany Matching Eliminating Intercompany Receivables and Payables Exercise 17: Create Business Rules for Intercompany Receivables and Payables Elimination Setting up Managerial Elimination (US) Exercise 18: Configure US Elimination

50 Minutes 50 Minutes 20 Minutes 25 Minutes 65 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 65 Minutes 65 Minutes 60 Minutes 50 Minutes 30 Minutes 75 Minutes 55 Minutes 55 Minutes 55 Minutes 30 Minutes 40 Minutes 60 Minutes 40 Minutes 45 Minutes 25 Minutes


Unit 5: Creating Controls and Business Process Flows 55 Minutes Using the Controls Monitor and Validating Data 70 Minutes Exercise 19: Create Data Control Business Rules

viii


2011

BPC440

Course Overview

Creating Consolidation Business Process Flows Exercise 20: Create a Business Process Flow for Consolidation

55 Minutes 90 Minutes

Course Goals This course will prepare you to: •

Set up and perform legal consolidation using SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation for NetWeaver.

Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • •

Set up the Dimensions and Models Prepare the dimension properties Collect the transaction data Configure balance carry forward and reclassification Set up and test journal templates Configure currency translation Use data controls Configure elimination business rules Report and analyze the data during and after the process

During expectations, it is critical that you find out who knows BW, BPC, and Consolidations. Then, adjust your lecture accordingly. Remember class is not meant to show how to implement software for student’s individual projects ... that is what consulting is for! The classroom is not the forum to discuss what the software should do! There should be more than enough material to cover in five days. Please try to cover at least 20% of the material each day. There are quite a few examples of how to configure cur tsl and elims. These are not intended to be compliant in any specific accounting standard! They are intended to communicate the concepts. When you teach this class, send me an e-mail the week before to charles.soper@sap.com for recent news on how the class has been going. Also, I will reply back with whatever demos I have at that time in ppt form! Right after introductions, please go over the table of contents for this class with the students so they understand what will be covered. Appendix material is always optional. User ID and Passwords for the Course

2011


ix

Course Overview

BPC440

Participants: User: BPC-##, password: training; ## = 00 - 25(Group number)

x


2011

Unit 1 Introduction

1

This is where you need to bring the class together by discussing a few of the basic concepts and doing level setting. The course scenario in the back of this unit is new, please cover it from a conceptual perspective to give students an idea of why they are doing their labs.

Unit Overview This unit teaches you the primary features of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, the key terms,, the features, the implementation guidelines, and the delivered content. You will also get to know the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • •

Explain the key terms Discuss the benefits of Planning and Consolidation Describe the components Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features Create an EPM add-in connection Describe the features of the EPM add-in Ribbon Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar Build a simple report Discuss the implementation process Describe business requirements in general for Planning and Consolidation Explain the advantages of the IFRS Starter Kit. Access more information if needed.

Unit Contents Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components ...3 Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in ................ 12

2011


1

Unit 1: Introduction

BPC440

Procedure: Connecting to a BW InfoProvider ........................... 20 Demonstration: Connecting to a BW InfoProvider ...................... 20 Procedure: Enabling the EPM add-in ..................................... 21 Exercise 1: Report and Plan in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-In ......................................................................... 35 Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation ..................................................................... 56 Lesson: Using the IFRS Starter Kit ............................................ 67

2


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 2

Lesson: Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components

Introducing the Benefits, the Interfaces, and the Components Lesson Duration: 40 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn about the benefits of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation as well as the interfaces, the key terms and components

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •

Explain the key terms Discuss the benefits of Planning and Consolidation Describe the components Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features

This is a nice opportunity to sell the positive aspects of BPC and to convey the high level features including how easy it is to work with and how flexible it is!

Business Example You are implementing the product and so you need to learn the key features, the interfaces, and the components.

The Key Terms In this section you will learn some of the key terms. Key Terms

2011

Term

Definition

Dimensions

Master data such as Companies and Accounts

Models

Transaction data such as expense values and exchange Rates

Environments

Contains Dimensions and Models for example

BW

Business Warehouse


3


BPC440

Properties

Related fields such as currency

Dimension Members

Example: Company C1000

Base Level Members

Members with no children

Prior Versions vs. 10.0 (1) Terms Previous Term

10.0 Term

Applications

Models

AppSets

Environments

Owner

Performer

DataSource Dimension Type

Audit Trail Dimension Type

Group Dimension Type

Scope Dimension Type

Live Reports

Web Reports / Input Forms

Dynamic Hierarchy Editor

Ownership Manager

Current View

Context

Member Access Profile

Data Access Profile

Apshell

EnvironmentShell

Validations

Controls

Note: The terms above apply to both platforms (listed below). (1) SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver (1) SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation10.0, version for the Microsoft Office platform Planning and Consolidation is part of Enterprise Performance Management

4


2011

BPC440


Figure 1: SAP BusinessObjects Portfolio with SAP Applications

Regardless of which interface is used for reporting, the data comes from one central database. From there, you can retrieve data into four possible interfaces. The data is stored in InfoCubes for each Model. The InfoCube is a star schema and is made up of a fact table and dimension tables.

Figure 2: Planning and Consolidation Architecture

The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in can be used to access data from multiple sources such as Planning and Consolidation and Profitability Cost Management for example.

2011


5


BPC440

The Data Retrieval options are the same regardless of the source, however, when used for Planning and Consolidation, additional features are available including data input and also data manager for example. The data manager is used to import data and also to run planning functions such as copy, delete, and move.

Figure 3: The Excel Interface of the EPM add–in

Note: The term Planning above refers to the Spread, Trend, and Weight functions that are used to disaggregate planning data. Workbook Collection refers to the Distribution and Collection feature that can be used to distribute reports via e-mail, for example, or to collect planning data entered in Excel templates. The ease of use of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation has always been a key feature along with the fact that data is stored on a central database and not in local spreadsheets.

6


2011

BPC440


Figure 4: The Value of Planning and Consolidation

Business Process Flows (BPFs) provide the customer with a web based launch pad, guided navigation, e-mail, and visibility of process status. Business Process Flows can be used to improve the coordination aspects of a process. Actions which are Open have an Action Required of To Perform. An action can only be performed if its preceding action is complete. That is why Planning Functions has a Status of Pending. The action status can also be changed via the Actions button.

2011


7


BPC440

Figure 5: Process-Centric

Since it is easy to use, IT does not always need to be involved in the configuration of Planning and Consolidation.

Figure 6: Set Up by IT - Owned and Maintained by Business Users

The users Home workspace provides an easy to use web interface.

8


2011

BPC440


Figure 7: The Home Workspace

The Home tab provides a very convenient entry point for Planning and Consolidation users and includes the following components: • • • • • • • • • •

2011

Start Page - includes links to create reports and launch the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in for example Activities - activities the user is involved in Process Monitor - includes the status of processes Library - includes public and private reports, input forms, workspaces, and dashboards for example Documents - this is a central storage location for important attachments Consolidation Central - the all-in-one interface for accountants Consolidation Monitor - used to execute closing activities and monitor progress Controls Monitor - used to execute data validation and monitor the results Journals - used to manage and create journal entries Ownership Manager - used to manage ownership data


9


BPC440

Facilitated Discussion Review the key terms.

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. What are the two main components of an Environment? What is a member with no children called?

10


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the key terms • Discuss the benefits of Planning and Consolidation • Describe the components • Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features

2011


11


Lesson: 10

BPC440

Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Lesson Duration: 125 Minutes

Lesson Overview This lesson shows you how to connect to the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in, use the EPM Context Bar, set user options, and work with reports and input schedules.


Create an EPM add-in connection Describe the features of the EPM add-in Ribbon Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar Build a simple report

We are trying to build a base level of knowledge so students can use the EPM interface effectively for subsequent labs.

Business Example Now that your company or client has implemented SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, you need to learn how to work with the new EPM add-in.

Overview of the EPM add-in In this section we will learn about the EPM add-in and how to connect to it. The EPM add-in is an Office add-in for Excel, Word, and PowerPoint.

12


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Introducing the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in

The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in has the following features. •

EPM Data Retrieval

•

– Create reports – Analyze data – Dynamic formatting – Calculations – Charts – Print and share – Integration Planning and Consolidation Only – – – –

Data input Planning functions Distribution and Collection Data manager

The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in can be used for the entire EPM Suite: • • • • • •

BPC 10.0 MS - Business Planning and Consolidation BPC 10.0 NW - Business Planning and Consolidation BOFC - BusinessObjects Financial Consolidation SSM - SAP BusinessObjects Strategy Management PCM - Profitability and Cost Management FIM - Financial Information Management

Types of Connections • • •

Planning and Consolidation SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (BI) platform Local

To access a specific InfoCube or model with the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in, you need to use a connection for a specific data source and a report. The Connections are managed in the Connections Manager dialog box. SAP BusinessObjects BI platform is only available if installed

2011


13


BPC440

In case you are asked, the EPM add-in has the capabilities to connect to all of these OLAP data sources: • • • • •

SSAS cubes created with SAP BusinessObjects Financial Consolidation, cube designer. SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCubes created with SAP BusinessObjects Financial Consolidation, cube designer. SAP BusinessObjects Profitability and Cost Management models. SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, version for SAP NetWeaver, models. SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, version for the Microsoft platform, models.

Using a Planning and Consolidation connection, the EPM add-in also enables you to enter data on SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation models.

Figure 8: Data Connectivity

14


2011

BPC440


Figure 9: Access BPC and BW Data Simultaneously

You can use the EPM add-in to read data from both SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation as well as a BW InfoProvider simultaneously.

Figure 10: Logging on from the EPM Tab

Logging on enables you to establish an initial connection between all the workbooks (for one Excel instance) and an InfoCube or a Model. When you log on, you select the initial connection for the workbooks. TheLogon dialog box proposes the default connection, if you have defined one. If it is left blank, you can click the ellipsis button and either select a previously defined connection or create a connection in the Connection Manager. The connection you select will then be considered the active connection. If you launch the EPM add-in from the Planning and Consolidation Web Administration, you see connections for all the models for which you have security.

2011


15


BPC440

Logging on to a connection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Use the Log on button to log on to a connection. The EPM Logon dialog appears. Click the ellipsis button to select a connection. Select a Connection and click Ok Enter your user id and password and click Logon. This dialog is bypassed when Single Sign On is configured. As an option, you can set any connection as the default by highlighting the connection and clicking Set as default.

Opening the Connection Manager In the EPM tab → Log on From Report Actions → Manage Connections From the EPM pane → Active Connection → Select Another Connection Note: The EPM Pane will only display Select Another Connection once you have established a connection. If you need another connection, you can create one in the Connection Manager. There are various ways to call the Connection Manager. When you open Excel with the EPM add-in, you can call the Connection Manager by clicking the Log on button on the EPM tab and then clicking the ellipsis button. You can also call Connection Manager by selecting EPM → Report Actions → Manage Connections. Additionally, once you have established a connection, you can Select Another Connection from the Active Connection drop down list of the EPM pane. The Active Connection is the connection for all the workbooks. Then, at any time, you can select another connection that will become the active connection for the current sheet. The Active Connection is used by default when a new report is built.

16


2011

BPC440


Figure 11: Creating a BPC Connection from the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in

Figure 12: Generating a Connection Name

2011


17


BPC440

Figure 13: Access the EPM - Connection Manager from the Web Client

Figure 14: The Local Connections Folder

Local connections are .oqy files. These connections can be stored on your machine or another machine on the network. You can select folders in which your administrator stores the local connections. Any connection in this folder will be automatically retrieved and you will only need to select one to use it.

18


2011

BPC440


Figure 15: Connecting to a BW InfoProvider

2011


19


BPC440

Connecting to a BW InfoProvider 17

1.

In the EPM Connection Manager choose Create

2.

From the Create Connection window select Local. Then from the Local Connections dropdown select SAP BW OLE DB Provider, then choose Connect

3.

In the window, enter your system credentials and then choose Next

4.

In the EPM-Logon window, enter your user name and password and choose Logon

5.

In the Create New OLE DB Data Source window choose $INFOCUBE and choose Finish.

6.

In the Create Connection window, choose the BW InfoProvider from the Select the cube/model that contains the data you want drop down box and then choose OK

7.

In the Browse for Folder window, select the folder where you would like to save this local connection and choose OK

Demonstration: Connecting to a BW InfoProvider Purpose Show how to display bw data in the EPM

System Data System: TZB Client: 001 User ID: nicoled Password: hotline Set up instructions: None 1. Follow the procedure above. For the credentials • • • • • •

20

Application Server: wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp Authentication method SAP BW Authentication Basic System number 40 Client 001 Language: your choice User nicoled, Password hotline


2011

BPC440


Enabling the EPM add-in 18

Use If the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in has been disabled, you can enable via the steps below:

Procedure 1.

In Microsoft Office Excel 2007, choose the Office button, then choose the Excel Options button.

2.

In the Excel Options window, choose Add-Ins.

3.

Choose Disabled Items from the Manage drop-down menu and choose the Go button.

4.

In the Disabled Items window, choose the SAP BusinessObjects EPM Solutions, add-in for Microsoft Office and choose the Enable button.

5.

Choose the Close button.

The EPM Ribbon In this section you will learn how to use the EPM add-in Ribbon.

Figure 16: EPM add-in Ribbon

2011


21


BPC440

The EPM add-in for Microsoft Office contains an EPM tab with a ribbon. The EPM tab is the main entry to perform reporting and data input actions. Depending on the Microsoft Office application (Excel, Work, PowerPoint), the EPM tab does not contain all the same commands. Note: When installing the EPM add-in, you specify the applications you use. For example, if you specified you would use Financial Consolidation, the Data Input group in the ribbon is not displayed since it is not relevant for this application. If you want to use Planning and Consolidation later on, you can display the commands that are related to Planning and Consolidation. When positioning your cursor on a command in the EPM tab, a tooltip appears, explaining the command. You do have the ability to customize the ribbon. To display or hide the commands or group of commands in the ribbon, select EPM → Options → Command Display Options

Figure 17: EPM - Command Display Options

Depending on the connection type of the selected report, and the related features that are available, interface items are hidden or shown. Here you define what interface items to hide or show. Your selections have priority over the visibility settings determined by the connection.

22


2011

BPC440


Connection Group Log on/off Connect or disconnect the connections of the Workbook Reports Group Open - Open reports or input forms from Local folder or Server folder Save - Save reports or input forms from Local folder or Server folder Edit Report - Call up EPM Report Editor New Report - Create a new report on the active connection Report Actions - Delete, copy or paste reports and manage connections View Formats - Open or close the EPM Formatting Sheet Refresh - Refresh the current worksheet. The data analysis group contains the following four options: Data Analysis Group Expand - Expand the selected member Collapse - Collapse the parent of the selected member Keep - Keep only the selected members Exclude - Exclude the selected member Undo Back: Undo up to the five most recent activities including: • • • • • • • • • •

Expand (Excel only) Collapse (Excel only) Keep member (Excel only) Exclude Member (Excel only) Member Recognition Row and column axes switch EPM pane changes Report Editor changes Member Selector changes Data refresh Note: The Back navigation action will be available on a spreadsheet until you do something else on the same spreadsheet using Excel, or another EPM add-in operation on any spreadsheet. Its purpose is to let you immediately back out of a navigational action, layout change, or refresh of the cube that was done in error or gave you undesirable results.

2011


23


BPC440

Data Input Save data - Save, refresh, and validate data. Change work status. Comments - Add and find comments Planning - Spread trend and weight functions Journals - Launch the journals workspace Collaboration Book publication - Publish precalculated workbooks to the web Distribution - Distribution and collection functions Portal publication - Publish to a BI launchpad Tools Drill through - Drill through to BW, ECC, or a Web site Quick links - Manage data, member, and report links Offline mode - Set the current workbook to offline Insert function - Launch the Excel Insert Function dialog box Options - Open the sheet, user, context, and command display options More - Freeze data refresh, access member properties, and so on Help About the EPM add-in Access the Planning and Consolidation on line help

The EPM Context Bar and the EPM Pane In this section you will learn how to move, resize, and hide EPM Context and EPM Panes.

24


2011

BPC440


Figure 18: EPM Context and EPM Panes

The first time you utilize EPM add-in, you must click the Show Pane & Context button on the EPM Ribbon to see the EPM Context Bar and EPM Pane. The EPM Context bar is displayed by default horizontally and below the ribbon. The EPM pane is displayed by default vertically on the right side of the window. Demo: Show the moving, resizing, closing, and hiding of the EPM Context Bar and EPM Pane

To move the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: • •

Use drag and drop or Click the dropdown arrow in the header, click Move. Then move the mouse cursor to the new position for the pane and click the mouse.

To re-size the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: • •

Move a corner by drag and drop or Click the dropdown arrow in the header, click Size, move the mouse cursor for the new size of the pane and click the pane corner

To close the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: • •

2011

Click the x in the corner of the pane. Click the dropdown arrow in the header, and click Close.


25


BPC440

To re-dock the EPM Pane or EPM Context Bar to their original position, double-click the Panes header. To hide the EPM Pane or the EPM Context Bar: •

•

On the EPM Ribbon Tools group, select the Options → User Options. Go to the Others tab, and deselect the Display EPM Context Bar and Display EPM Pane checkboxes in the lower right-hand corner. Use the toggle button Show Pane & Context in the EPM Ribbon. (This will show or hide both panes.) Note: The Show Pane & Context toggle button will only work so long as you have your User Options set to display these panes.

The EPM Context Bar In this section you will learn about the features of the EPM Context Bar. The EPM - Context Includes: • • •

The dimensions that are included in the current InfoCube / Model. The members that are used in the current display of an online report The saved members in an offline report

Figure 19: The EPM Context Bar

The context defines, for each dimension of a selected cube/model, a member corresponding to the default member to be applied. Dimension members that are selected in the axes of a report override the members selected in the EPM context and subsequent context pane changes will not be used to select data. Therefore, it might be prudent to hide or lock the dimension.

26


2011

BPC440


Figure 20: EPM Context Lock tab

Figure 21: Locked Dimensions are Grayed Out

On the Context Lock tab, you can select, hide, or lock members for the EPM Context Barl. You can define this at the worksheet and at the workbook level. To lock a dimension on a workbook or worksheet, go to the EPM Ribbon and select Options → Context Options. In the Context Lock tab, select the level from the Context Level drop-down menu (workbook or worksheet), then click the member hyperlink of the dimension you are locking to open the Member Selector. Then select the member you wish to lock the dimension with. The Lock checkbox is automatically checked for the dimension. If you set the member at the workbook level, this affects all worksheets in the workbook.

2011


27


BPC440

Figure 22: Member Selection: The EPM Pane Takes Precedence Over the EPM Context

You can also set a filter for a dimension by using the Page Axis in the EPM Pane. Caution: The members selected in the axes of a report override the members selected in the context. For this reason, you may consider hiding the dimensions if you choose to filter them in the Page Axis.

28


2011

BPC440


Figure 23: The EPM - Context With Category Hidden

Figure 24: The Context Display Tab

Here you define the EPM Context Bar options. The list of dimensions changes from one worksheet to another. In the Context Display tab, you define the display of the EPM Context Bar. You can specify display settings for the context by selecting EPM → Options → Context Options.

2011


29


BPC440

The following options are available on the Context Display Options tab: •

•

•

•

Hiding Dimensions: You can decide not to display a dimension in the EPM Context bar by selecting the Hide checkbox. This checkbox is available on both the Context Display and Context Lock tabs. This is helpful if you have locked a dimension on the worksheet or if you decide to filter using the Page Axis and want to hide it from the EPM Context bar. Dimension and Member Name Display: The name of the dimension and the name of the member are displayed in the EPM Context bar by default. If you prefer to only show the member name, and not the dimension name, you can uncheck the Show Dimension Name option. Dimension Color: Colors are displayed by default in the EPM Context bar. You can choose not to display the colors by unchecking the Show Dimension Color option. Additionally, you can define the colors you want by clicking the colored area in the Color column and selecting a color from the palette. Dimension Order: You can modify the default order of the dimensions as they appear in the EPM Context bar by selecting a dimension and clicking the Up or Down button.

The EPM Pane SAP BusinessObjects EPM solutions 10.0, add-in for Microsoft Office (the EPM add-in) provides multiple ways to create a new report including: • • • •

EPM Report Editor Entering members directly in a sheet EPM Pane Drag and Drop

This section will show how to create a report using the EPM Pane.

30


2011

BPC440


Figure 25: EPM Pane

The EPM Pane is a graphic user-interface for defining a report. For all three report building options, any dimension member not specified in the report definition will be derived from the EPM Member Selector. In the Current Report area of the pane, you can drag and drop one or several dimensions to the following sections to create a report • • •

Page Axis (Optional) Row Axis Column Axis

As soon as you drag and drop at least one dimension in the row axis and one dimension in the column axis, the report with the selected dimension is displayed in the worksheet. However, this only occurs if the Defer Layout Update option is not checked, If you select the Defer Layout Update option, the Update button is enabled, which will prevent the report layout from being updated automatically each time a change to the axes section is made.

This can help improve performance when you are accessing a large amount of data. This will allow you to quickly add, move, and remove dimensions from the dimensions section to the axes sections. Then you can select Update when you are finished.

2011


31


BPC440

By default, the member taken into account for a dimension is the one defined in the context, with the Member and Children relationship. Once a dimension has been added to an axis section, you can select another member for the dimension by clicking the dimension name that appears as a link. The Member Selector opens and you can select the member you want. When placing several dimensions in one axis, you can reorder the dimensions by selecting a dimension row (click to the right of the dimension link, not the link itself) and perform a drag and drop. This can also be accomplished by selecting a dimension, and using the dropdown. EPM Pane: Drag & Drop to Spreadsheet: You can also use the EPM Pane to build a report by dragging the dimensions from the Current Report area to the Excel spreadsheet.

Figure 26: Highlight Report

The Highlight Current Report option will color code the report based on the page, row, and column axis and current connection to the EPM solution. This option will be extremely useful for those worksheets that are complex with reports from multiple data sources.

32


2011

BPC440


Figure 27: Select other members

In this section you will learn how to create reports via drag and drop.

2011


33


34

BPC440


2011

BPC440

31


Exercise 1: Report and Plan in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-In Exercise Duration: 45 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Connect to the Excel interface of the EPM add-in • Use delivered templates • Configure user options • Create a template via drag and drop • Save templates • Use input schedules

Business Example You need to use the EPM add-in to run some delivered reports, create your own reports, and enter some transaction data.

Task 1: Create a connection and configure user options. 1.

Create a connection to the Expense model for your assigned environment. Open native Excel, go to the EPM ribbon and log on Create a connection with server URL: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate your connection name. Your environment will depend on which class you are in: Class

Environment

BPC410

BPC410_SMASTER

BPC420

BPC420_##

BPC430

BPC430_##

BPC440

BPC440_##

Continued on next page

2011


35


2.

BPC440

Define the user settings to display the EPM context bar and EPM pane, display the EPM context bar outside of the EPM pane, and activate member recognition by default. Hint: You may need to use the right arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the right.

3.

Deactivate the display of dimension name and color.

4.

Set your context members as shown below. Dimension

Member ID - Description

P_Account

PL400 - Indirect Expenses

P_Category

PLAN - Plan

P_Cost

DIRECT - Direct

P_Curr

LC - Local Currency

P_Time

2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total

Measures

PERIODIC - Periodic

Note: Measure is a dimension provided by the system that allows you to view period vs. cumulative data. 5.

Practice the list vs. hierarchy display as well as the filtering in the P_Account member selector for the Calc Member Flag property. To Practice

Do This

The List vs. Click the down arrow next to the field and select List Hierarchy display Member Filtering by Properties

1. 2.

Select the filter icon to display members based on their Calc Member Flag property. To deactivate the filter, click the red X.

Task 2: Use a delivered template to analyze data, modify the context member selections, and practice the drill down and back options to view the data at the level of detail you need. 1.

Open the Dynamic Report with Nested Rows to view the data for indirect expenses. Continued on next page

36


2011

BPC440


2.

Drill down to the months for Q1. Then use the Back option in the Undo panel. Hint: You may need to use the left arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the left in the next step.

Task 3: Create a report via drag and drop, then save it to the company folder for later use. 1.

In the Expense model, create a new workbook and use drag and drop to build a report with account by entity in the rows and time in the columns.

2.

Define the P_Account members as base members for the net income parent. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen.

3.

Hide the empty rows.

4.

Restrict the time members to Base Level for 2011 and the entity members to Member and Children for the TOTAL ID.

5.

Save the report as the Account by Entity Trend ## in the Company Reports folder.

Task 4: Change the Account by Entity Trend ## report so you can input budget data.

2011

1.

Switch your P_Category context to Budget and deactivate suppression.

2.

Switch the report to an Input Form and set the Keep Formula on Data option so that your formulas are not overridden.

3.

Select Consulting for the rows.

4.

Enter the following data for January 2011: Account

Amount

Personnel Cost

25,000

Travel and Entertainment

2,000

Advertising and Promotion

500

5.

Use cell formulas to add 5% for February to December and save the data to the database.

6.

Confirm that your formulas were not overwritten.

7.

Save your input template to the Input Schedules folder for the company as Account by Entity Input.


37


BPC440

Solution 1: Report and Plan in the Excel Interface of the EPM Add-In Task 1: Create a connection and configure user options. 1.

Create a connection to the Expense model for your assigned environment. Open native Excel, go to the EPM ribbon and log on Create a connection with server URL: http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes). Let the system generate your connection name. Your environment will depend on which class you are in: Class

Environment

BPC410

BPC410_SMASTER

BPC420

BPC420_##

BPC430

BPC430_##

BPC440

BPC440_##

a)

From your remote desktop, call the Start menu and choose Programs → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Excel opens and displays a new worksheet.

b)

On the EPM tab, choose Log On. The EPM - Logon dialog box is displayed.

c)

Next to the Connection field, choose the Ellipses(...) button. The EPM - Connection Manager opens.

d)

Choose Create. Caution: If you are in the BPC410 select the Version for the Microsoft Platform type. Use Server URL http://wdflbmt7121:1080/sap/bpc/

e)

In the Server URL field, enter http://wdflbmt7122.wdf.sap.corp:54080/sap/bpc/ (no dashes) as shown below.


38


2011

BPC440


Figure 28: Create Connection - NetWeaver

f)

Choose Connect.

g)

If prompted, enter your user id and password to create the connection.

h)

User ID

Password

BPC-##

training

Choose Logon. Environments and models are loaded.

i)

j)

Use the dropdown to select your environment and model. Environment

Model

Your assigned environment

Expense

Choose Generate Connection Name. The system generates a connection name made up of the model ID and environment ID.

k)

Choose OK twice.

l)

If Prompted, enter your user ID and password to access your environment and model. Continued on next page

2011


39


BPC440

m)

User ID

Password

BPC-##

training

Choose Logon. The EPM pane appears on the right.

2.

Define the user settings to display the EPM context bar and EPM pane, display the EPM context bar outside of the EPM pane, and activate member recognition by default. Hint: You may need to use the right arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the right. a)

Choose Options → User Options...

Figure 29: Tools Options

b)

On the Others tab, select Activate Member Recognition by Default, Display EPM Context bar, and Display EPM Pane.


40


2011

BPC440


Figure 30: User Options

c)

Select Display Local Connections.

d)

Choose OK. You can now use the Show Pane and Context button to toggle the pane and context on and off.


2011


41


3.

BPC440

Deactivate the display of dimension name and color. a)

Choose Options → Context options.

b)

Deselect Show Dimension Name and Show Dimension Color as shown below.

Figure 31: Context Options

c) 4.

Choose OK.



P_Account

PL400 - Indirect Expenses

P_Category

PLAN - Plan

P_Cost

DIRECT - Direct

P_Curr

LC - Local Currency

P_Time

2011.TOTAL - 2011 Total

Measures

PERIODIC - Periodic

Note: Measure is a dimension provided by the system that allows you to view period vs. cumulative data. a)

Click in the EPM Context field for P_Account, and choose Select Other Members... from the dropdown list. The EPM - Member Selector opens.


42


2011

BPC440


b)

Under Select member names to display, select Description from the dropdown list. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen to see the OK button in the next step.

Figure 32: EPM - Member Selector

c)

Expand the nodes and choose Indirect Expenses. Choose OK. Your context is now set to Indirect Expenses.

d)

Use the same method to select your remaining context members as shown below.

Figure 33: Ribbon with Context

5.

Practice the list vs. hierarchy display as well as the filtering in the P_Account member selector for the Calc Member Flag property. Continued on next page

2011


43


BPC440

To Practice

Do This

The List vs. Click the down arrow next to the field and select List Hierarchy display Member Filtering by Properties

1. 2.

a)

Select the filter icon to display members based on their Calc Member Flag property. To deactivate the filter, click the red X.

In the EPM context field for P_Account, choose Select Other Members... The EPM - Member Selector is displayed.

b)

Select the dropdown box next to Hierarchy and choose List.

c)

Choose Filter and make your selections as shown below:

Figure 34: Select Other Members

You can see the parent account members whose values are calculated. d)

Choose Cancel.


44


2011

BPC440


Task 2: Use a delivered template to analyze data, modify the context member selections, and practice the drill down and back options to view the data at the level of detail you need. 1.

Open the Dynamic Report with Nested Rows to view the data for indirect expenses. a)

In the EPM ribbon, select Open → Open Server Root Folder...

Figure 35: Open Server Root Folder

The Open dialog box is displayed. b)

On the left of the dialog box, choose Company(Public), Reports → Templates.

c)

Select the Dynamic Report with Nested Rows.


2011


45


BPC440

Figure 36: Open Dynamic Template

d)

Choose OK and Refresh.

Figure 37: Dynamic Template Results

The report opens and displays the most recent data.


46


2011

BPC440


2.

Drill down to the months for Q1. Then use the Back option in the Undo panel. Hint: You may need to use the left arrow to scroll the EPM ribbon to the left in the next step. a)

Double-click Q1 2011 to drill down to monthly data.

Figure 38: Drill Down to Months

b)

In the Undo panel, choose Back.


2011


47


BPC440

Task 3: Create a report via drag and drop, then save it to the company folder for later use. 1.

In the Expense model, create a new workbook and use drag and drop to build a report with account by entity in the rows and time in the columns. a)

Choose the Office Button , then New → New Workbook. The New Workbook dialog opens.

b)

Choose Create.

c)

From the EPM Pane, drag the dimensions to the cells specified below. Dimension

Cell

P_Cost

B4

P_Account

C4

P_Time

D3

Figure 39: Drag and Drop Initial Result


48


2011

BPC440


2.

Define the P_Account members as base members for the net income parent. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen. a)

On the lower right on the Row axis, click P_Account (in blue hypertext) The EPM - Member Selector is displayed.

b)

Select the Net Income parent.

c)

In Selection Relationship on the lower left, select Base Level.

d)

Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members.

e)

Similarly, choose the left arrow to remove the prior selection.

Figure 40: Member sSelection

f)

Choose OK The EPM - Member Selector closes and you have base level members for net income in the rows.


2011


49


3.

BPC440

Hide the empty rows. a)

Choose Options → Sheet options. The EPM Sheet Options dialog box is displayed.

b)

In the Empty Data Behavior field, select Remove.

Figure 41: Hide Empty Rows

c)

Choose OK → Refresh.

Figure 42: Hide Empty Rows Result

The empty rows are removed.


50


2011

BPC440


4.

Restrict the time members to Base Level for 2011 and the entity members to Member and Children for the TOTAL ID. a)

On the Column axis, choose P_Time. The EPM - Member Selector is displayed.

b)

Select the 2011 parent.

c)

In Selection Relationship on the lower left, select Base Level.

d)

Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. Choose the blue left arrow to remove the prior selection.

e)

Choose OK.

f)

Use the same steps to display Member and Children for the P_Cost dimension for the Total parent.

Figure 43: Time Base Members

Your report now has months in the columns for the Direct, Support, and Total cost center groups. 5.

Save the report as the Account by Entity Trend ## in the Company Reports folder. a)

In the EPM menu, choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder. The Save dialog box is displayed.

b)

Choose Company (Public) → Reports. In the File Name field, enter Account by Entity Trend.

c)

Choose Save.


2011


51


BPC440

Task 4: Change the Account by Entity Trend ## report so you can input budget data. 1.

Switch your P_Category context to Budget and deactivate suppression. a)

In the EPM Context, left click PLAN → Select Other Members.

b)

Choose Budget → OK.

c)

Choose Options → Sheet options.

d)

In the Empty Data Behavior field, select Keep → OK.

e)

Choose Refresh. The report should display blank rows since no budget data exists.

2.

Switch the report to an Input Form and set the Keep Formula on Data option so that your formulas are not overridden. a)

Choose Options → Sheet Options. The EPM - Sheet Options are displayed.

b)

Select Use as Input Form .

c)

Choose the Refresh tab and select Keep Formula on Data.

Figure 44: Keep Formula on Data

d)

Choose OK.


52


2011

BPC440


3.

Select Consulting for the rows. a)

On the Row axis, choose P_Cost. The EPM - Member Selector is displayed.

4.

b)

Select the Consulting member.

c)

Choose the right arrow to move the selection to Selected Members. Choose the blue left arrow to remove the prior selection.

d)

In Select member names to display, select ID from the dropdown list.

e)

Choose OK.

Enter the following data for January 2011: Account

Amount

Personnel Cost

25,000

Travel and Entertainment

2,000

Advertising and Promotion

500

a)

Enter the values as shown above.


2011


53


5.

BPC440

Use cell formulas to add 5% for February to December and save the data to the database. a)

In E6, enter the following formula: =D6*1.05

b)

Copy the formula and paste it into the cells to E7 and E8.

c)

Copy E6:8 to F6:8 through O6:8.

d)

Choose Save Data → Save Worksheet Data

Figure 45: Save Worksheet Data

The EPM - Submit Data dialog box is displayed. e)

To send the data, choose Yes The Save Results dialog box is displayed.

f) 6.

Confirm that your formulas were not overwritten. a)

7.

Choose OK.

Select cell E6 to check if the formula is still the cell.

Save your input template to the Input Schedules folder for the company as Account by Entity Input. a)

In the EPM ribbon, choose Save → Save to Server Root folder. The Save dialog box appears.

54

b)

Choose Company (Public) → Input Schedules.

c)

In the File Name field, enter Account by Entity Input ##.

d)

Choose Save.


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create an EPM add-in connection • Describe the features of the EPM add-in Ribbon • Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar • Build a simple report

2011


55


Lesson: 52

BPC440

Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Lesson Duration: 35 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn about implementing Planning and Consolidation

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Discuss the implementation process Describe business requirements in general for Planning and Consolidation

This is a high level overview of the process of gathering business requirements for BPC. This lesson touches on Reporting, Planning, as well as Consolidation.

Business Example Your company or your client has purchased SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation and so you need to learn how to implement it

Implementation Factors Every project has the following factors to consider

56


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation

Figure 46: Implementation Factors

Factors to consider Factor

Example

Project Objectives

Define the project objectives. For example, implement cost center planning.

Scope

Determine the scope of the implementation. For example, the scope may only be for North America and Europe

Strategy

Define the project strategy. For example, perform most cost center planning using Planning and Consolidation

Timeline

Define both the timeline for the entire project and the implementation sequence

Sequence

Determine the sequence of events from a project planning perspective

Resources

Identify internal project team members and consultants required

The Roadmap to Success SAP and its partners have implementation methodologies that are used to standardize the process. The Roadmap includes the key steps in the process to implement a solution. 1.

2. 3.

SAP BI Strategic Decision - For Planning and Consolidation, you may need to decide whether to use an existing BW server or install a standalone server for example. Pilot Project - to help determine your To Be solution, a Pilot phase may be beneficial Project - once your To Be solution is determined, proceed with the implementation

The Implementation Roadmap forms the methodical framework for the steps that you require to implement SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. It includes the necessary project management, the configuration for the business processes as well as the technical features, the test procedure, and the training concepts. The methodology of the Implementation Roadmap supports the inclusion of those requirements that are used as the basis for installing Planning and Consolidation.

2011


57


BPC440

Figure 47: The Roadmap to Success

• • • • •

Project Preparation - initial project planning, project procedures, landscape strategy Business Blueprint - project planning, architecture Realization - configure the initial solution Final Preparation - test the solution, conduct training Go Live and Support - cut over to the new system, follow up on possible go live issues

Business requirements sit at the center of the project. The scope of your initiative must be driven by business requirements. A key ingredient is to gather accurate requirements is the information gathering process.

58


2011

BPC440


Figure 48: Information Gathering Process

•

Preparation –

•

Identification of the interview/workshop team as well as the interviewees/attendees – Scheduling interviews/workshops – Communication of project goals, roles, and responsibilities Requirements analysis

–

•

Use SAP delivered Business Content as a first step to structure the analysis – Collect the business requirements with a focus on the processes – Find an adequate combination of interview and workshop techniques Matching

•

– Check user requirements against the Business Content – Gap Identification – Develop strategies to close gaps Presentation – – –

Prepare and publish the results Find agreement on next steps Determination of success criteria and risk factors

Development Guidelines Here are some development guidelines to keep in mind.

2011


59


60

BPC440


2011

BPC440


Figure 49: Development Guidelines

• • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

•

Naming guidelines - define naming conventions for all objects Responsibilities - define and communicate to each team member Authorization concept - build your security plan early in the project Global / Local data - identify data staging layers where you may have a corporate repository of Global data vs. an application-specific set of Local data. Master data - identify where master data will be maintained Transaction data - identify where transaction data will be sourced from Data flow - similar to the above, but include transformations Data targets - in the data flow, where will data be stored? BI objects - what BW objects will be involved in the data flow? Data model integration - are there integration points between BW and Planning InfoCubes for example? EDW - is there a need to use other Enterprise Data Warehousing solutions such as Informatica? Archiving - a life cycle strategy is important to reduce the storage of older data Initial data transfer - during start up, how will the initial data transfer occur? Data handling - similar to the above, but also include possible transformation and mapping Operating concept / transports - where will new objects be created and how will the transport process work? Business content - during the gathering of business requirements, check to see if you can use any delivered business content Documentation - document why your solution and objects are built the way they are so that subsequent team members can follow what you did for example Special topics

Requirements Analysis Gathering business requirements may be the most important part of a project, and the most challenging!

2011


61


BPC440

Figure 50: Requirements Analysis

• • • • • •

Project focus - this should be done periodically since conditions change through time Interviews - conduct with individuals or small groups to ensure that everyone has input. Collect information about the business process Workshops - use larger groups to do brainstorming Documentation - good documentation is critical to avoid miscommunication Gap analysis - compare as is vs. to be future state Reporting requirements - include planning and/or consolidation requirements of course

Analysis Levels Granularity along with storage of historical data is one of the most important requirements from a performance perspective. Too much detail can cause performance issues later on. When gathering business requirements, it is critical to identify what level of detail is really needed. Similar data requirements include: • • •

62

How soon do you need to have ECC data in BW? How much history do you need to store? When can data be archived?


2011

BPC440


Figure 51: Analysis Levels

Here are some sample business requirements for a consolidation project. • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

How many legal entities and currencies? How many local charts of accounts? How many fiscal calendars? Is there a service level agreement for performance milestones? (example: a posting in ECC must be in the Consolidation Model in 15 minutes) What is a day in the life of a typical accountant? Automate ownership eliminations? What types of eliminations? What journal entries / reclassifications will you need? What data validations? What Logic Scripts might be needed for balancing? How many accounting standards? IFRS, US GAAP, and so on. Does the actual data include trading partner? Is the source data periodic or year to date? Etc. Hint: A reclassification for example would be required to move a subsidiary’s finished goods inventory into work in process.

2011


63


BPC440

Here is are some sample implementation steps for a consolidation project. • • • • • • • • • • • • •

64

Gather the business requirements Compare as is vs. to be Consider delivered content Specify the required architecture Develop the data flow requirements Create the environment Create dimensions and properties Create models and set up security Set up Data Manager packages, Llogic scripts, business rules Update exchange rates and ownership data Set up work status and a business process flow Create the journal template Create new reports


2011

BPC440


Facilitated Discussion Discuss critical success factors when implementing.

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. What do you think is the most important critical success factor when implementing Planning and Consolidation?

2011


65


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss the implementation process • Describe business requirements in general for Planning and Consolidation

66


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 62

Lesson: Using the IFRS Starter Kit

Using the IFRS Starter Kit Lesson Duration: 25 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn about the advantages of the IFRS Starter Kit. Note: IFRS - International Financial Reporting Standards


Explain the advantages of the IFRS Starter Kit. Access more information if needed.

At some point during the week, demo the starter kit if possible. If you are stretched for time on the 1st day, cover IFRS later in the week.

Business Example You need an understanding of what is delivered with the IFRS Starter Kit so that you can use it to speed up your install.

IFRS Starter Kit - The Problems it Solves The IFRS Starter Kit may be used to meet your accounting requirements for any accounting standard not just IFRS. Problems it may solve: •

Implementation time and cost

•

– Reinventing the wheel during each implementation – Non-optimal usage of time and resources – Flexibility is paid for through extensive setup Compliance with financial standards and regulations – – –

2011

Dynamic regulatory landscape Significant time and resources spent on complying with global and local standards Insufficient financial standards expertise within the organization


67


•

BPC440

Exploiting the application’s full potential – – –

Lack of essential skills and knowledge on functional and technical product best practices Pay-offs as a result of time and resource constraints Poor execution of related business processes

Reduce Implementation Times Every consolidation project has the potential to use delivered content and cut down on the implementation time since many of the requirements are similar to other projects.

Figure 52: Reduce Your Implementation Time

IFRS Components With the IFRS Starter Kit, you don’t have to create everything from scratch.

68


2011

BPC440


Figure 53: IFRS Components

Delivered Business Rules The best practice is to use delivered content whenever possible, including Business Rules.

Figure 54: Delivered Business Rules

Expertise and Best Practice You can take advantage of content that has already been put to good use by others.

2011


69


BPC440

Figure 55: Expertise and Best Practice

IFRS Summary

Figure 56: IFRS Summary

70


2011

BPC440


IFRS - More Information

Figure 57: Where to go for more Information

2011


71


BPC440

Facilitated Discussion Discuss how delivered content can be used to shorten implementation times.

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. How might your company or client use the IFRS Start Kit?

72


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the advantages of the IFRS Starter Kit. • Access more information if needed.

2011


73

Unit Summary

BPC440

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the key terms • Discuss the benefits of Planning and Consolidation • Describe the components • Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features • Create an EPM add-in connection • Describe the features of the EPM add-in Ribbon • Define default values for dimensions with the EPM Context Bar • Build a simple report • Discuss the implementation process • Describe business requirements in general for Planning and Consolidation • Explain the advantages of the IFRS Starter Kit. • Access more information if needed.

74


2011

Unit 2 Creating the Structures

69

Focus on the consolidation related aspects of the architecture.

Unit Overview In this unit you will learn about Environments, Models, Dimensions, and their Properties. This implementation phase of a project would normally be carried out after gathering the business requirements. You will also learn about the balancing logic that is used in consolidation.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • •

Describe Environments Create Dimensions Add Properties Create Hierarchies Create models for legal consolidation Explain the Model Types Describe how Models reference each other Explain how to use the three types of logic Specify how logic is used to run consolidation tasks Identify examples of how to use balancing logic

Unit Contents Lesson: Setting up Environments and Master Data......................... 77 Procedure: How to Create An Environment ............................. 79 Exercise 2: Maintain Dimensions for Consolidation .................... 95 Lesson: Creating Models for Consolidation ................................ 110

2011


75

Unit 2: Creating the Structures

BPC440

Procedure: How to Create a Model ...................................... 116 Exercise 3: Create Consolidation Models ............................... 119 Lesson: Creating Consolidation Logic .......................................136 Procedure: How to Include Logic in the Default Logic File............142 Exercise 4: Create Consolidation Logic Files...........................147 Exercise 5: Create Balancing Logic......................................155

76


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 70

Lesson: Setting up Environments and Master Data

Setting up Environments and Master Data Lesson Duration: 65 Minutes

Lesson Overview Learn how to use master data in consolidation scenarios.


Describe Environments Create Dimensions Add Properties Create Hierarchies

Our emphasis is on the consolidation-relevant concepts and not so much on the BPC detailed architecture, which the BPC420 covers.

Business Example You are in the build phase of your project and you need to start work on the dimensions, properties, and hierarchies.

Environments The starting point in any project is to create the Environment. • • • •

An Environment consists primarily of Models and Dimensions Dimensions can be used by any Model within an Environment The delivered Environment is called EnvironmentShell EnvironmentShell includes four Models with the associated templates and packages Note: The IFRS Starter Kit includes an Environment as well.

2011


77


BPC440

The EnvironmentShell environment contains the following components needed to build a functioning environment. Four sample models — Planning, Rate, Consolidation, and Ownership — that contain most of the functionality you need to start building your own environment. 1.

Consolidation The Consolidation model contains income statement and balance sheet data.

2.

Ownership The Ownership model is a supporting model for a consolidation reporting model. It stores information such as the consolidation methods, ownership percentages, and group roll up information used for legal consolidation.

3.

Planning The Planning model is a multi-currency financial model. It is designed, by default, to accommodate currency translation.

4.

Rate The Rate model, which stores the exchange rates, is assigned to the Financial and Consolidation models as a supporting model. Note: If you need to build more complex environments, for example, for legal reporting, you can build an environment using the components included within EnvironmentShell and then add you own if needed.

78


2011

BPC440


How to Create An Environment 72

1.

Go to Planning and Administration and choose Manage All Environments

2.

Choose ENVIRONMENTSHELL → Copy

3.

Enter an ID and a Description of your choice. Note: No spaces are allowed in the ID but you can use underscores.

4.

Select what you would like to copy: •

Data in Models - this will copy the transaction data Note: Master data is always copied

• • 5.

Web Documents - this will copy the Web client Library Documents, which includes Web reports and input forms for example Documents - this will copy attachments such as word and excel documents

Choose Copy Your new Environment is being created with Dimensions and Models for example.

6.

To access your new Environment, choose Back to Administration → Home → Start Page → Click your current Environment at the bottom of the screen.

7.

Choose your new Environment

Dimension Types Dimensions make up the master data. There are several types. Dimension Types

2011

Dimension Name

Type

Definition

Account

A

Contains your chart of accounts.

Audit

D

Identifies the origin of values such as input, manual journal entries, elimination. Referred to as DataSource in prior releases

Category

C

Contains the versions of data you are going to track, such as actual, budget, and so on.

Currency

R

Contains the currencies in which your company does business.


79


BPC440

Entity

E

Contains the business entities that are used to drive the business process. For legal consolidation, this would be a legal subsidiary.

Group

G

Contains consolidation group members. Elimination entries are made at the group level using these base level members. Referred to as Scope in the EnvironmentShell

Intercompany

I

Contains the intercompany IDs for the entities. (you might think of this as trading partner)

Subtables

S

Used in consolidation to track opening balance, additions, reductions, and so on.

Time

T

Contains the time periods for which you want to store data.

User-defined

U

These provide additional reporting parameters.

Consolidation Properties Properties are related fields for dimension members.

Properties are used for: • • •

Data Selections Program calls Display in reports

Properties are created in several ways: • • •

User Defined System Generated based on the dimension type Required if used for Consolidation, Rate, or Ownership Models

When creating a new dimension, or changing an existing one, you can add your own properties by selecting New Property. As of 10.0, the system will require properties depending on the dimension type and model by selecting Required Properties for Consolidation or Required Properties for Ownership. Referential Integrity is used to validate property values. Allow Member Formulas allows you to use dimension member formulas.

80


2011

BPC440


Figure 58: Adding the required properties for the account dimension.

Note: Allow Member Formulas would permit the use of a dimension member formula such as Gross Margin % for example. When creating an account type dimension, the system will require the TYPELIM property for Consolidation Models for example. The table below includes the other properties that are required depending on the model type.

2011


81


BPC440

Required Properties by Dimension Type and Model Type (defined below) Dimension Type

Consolidation

Ownership

Account

TypeElim

IS_Input

Entity

Elim, FX_Type, Intco

Time

Monthnum

Currency

Currency_Type

Rate

M-Multiply, D-Divide

Hint: Direct rates would be designated with an M while indirect rates would use a D. Note: Category and Data Source type dimensions have several properties required for Consolidation Models. (not shown above) Note: The definition of the above properties is provided in the following sections in order by dimension.

82


2011

BPC440


Account Type Dimension

Figure 59: The C_acct Dimension

Note: Apply Hierarchy Order allows you to display the members in order based on a hierarchy. Display allows you to switch to the technical name or description of properties. Export to CSV allows you to download the members. • • • • • • • • •

2011

ACCTYPE is required for account type dimensions and is used to control sign display and aggregation behavior in reporting. DIMLIST# properties are used as selection criteria in business rules. ELIMACC is used in the US Elimination process to identify offset accounts. FORMULA can be used in any dimension to store dimension logic. GROUP is used to identify accounts as Profit & Loss (PL) or Balance Sheet (BS) accounts for reporting. IS_INPUT is used for report filtering. RATETYPE is required in account type dimensions and is used to store AVG or END (for example) rate types for currency translation. SCALING is used to display values in thousands for example in formula based reports. TYPELIM is used as selection criteria in business rules.


83


BPC440

The ACCTYPE property is automatically added by the system when creating an account type dimension. It is used to prevent aggregation over time for balance sheet items for example. In the case below, note that CASH is 130 for the Q1 Total.

Figure 60: Account Type Property

Note: PL = Profit and Loss Statement. BS = Balance Sheet.

Subtables Type Dimension Flow members are used to track opening vs. closing balance for example. This is the S - Subtables dimension type.

84


2011

BPC440


Figure 61: Subtables Type Dimension: Flow

Note: The flow type property is required in this dimension. You need to have one member with the flow type of opening and one with closing for the balance carryforward program. The flow dimension is used to break down the account activity. For example, some accounts like fixed assets us a subtable dimension to identify opening, additions, deletions, transfers, and ending balances. The subtable type dimension is important for writing business rules that require currency translation amounts to be calculated by account. Since the subtable information can be used for multiple accounts, it requires its own dimension.

Entity Type Dimension The Entity dimension defines the organizational structure of the business units for your Model. Any dimension that is assigned the type E is an Entity dimension. Generally speaking, the Entity dimension contains the business units that are used to drive the business process. For consolidation this will be the legal entity in most cases.

2011


85


BPC440

Figure 62: Entity Dimension

Note: The properties for Entity type dimensions are defined as follows: •

CURRENCY is a required property and is used store the local or functional currency for each entity. Note: Currencies assigned to the groups such as H1 and CG1-4 as well as E_CGx members are only used for reporting purposes and do not affect currency translation or elimination.

• • • • •

ELIM is used by US Eliminations to identify which members to include via a Y value. FX_TYPE can be used to select entity specific currency translation parameters in the business rule tables via the Entity FX Type column. INTCO is used identity the trading partner ID. OWNER is used to store the user ID for work status activity for example. REVIEWER is used to store the user ID for Business Process Flow reviewers for example.

Intercompany Type Dimension The Intercompany dimension defines members for intercompany data to perform intercompany elimination.

86


2011

BPC440


Figure 63: Intco Dimension

The property for Intercompany type dimension is defined as follows: •

ENTITY is a required property and is used to link the related entity member. Intercompany is normally referenced to the entity dimension.

Category Type Dimension Category is used to store actual vs. plan data for example. The properties for Category type dimensions are defined as follows: • •

• •

CATEGORY_FOR_OPE can be used by the balance carryforward (BCF) program to use a target version that is different from the source. FX_DIFFERENCE_ONLY, FX_SOURCE_CATEGORY, RATE_CATEGORY, RATE_PERIOD, RATE_YEAR, STARTMTH are all used for currency translation simulations. OPENING_PERIOD is used to specify a month different than the prior month for balance carryforward. YEAR can be used in planning scenarios to control user input to the appropriate time frame based on the version. Otherwise any category member can be used for any time member.

Group Type Dimension Note: This Dimension is discussed in the elimination unit. The group dimension is used to store data at the groups level.

2011


87


BPC440

Figure 64: ConsGroup Dimension

The properties for Group type dimensions are defined as follows: • • • •

Conso_Type is used to filter by group members in the Elimination and Adjustment Rule in the header field named Group Type Filter Currency_Type is used to identify whether a group member should be valued at the G (Group) currency or N (Local) currency. Datasrc_Level is used to control the recording of elimination entries to higher level groups Entity is used to identify the entity members that will be used for the group level elimination values. If this is filled with a valid entity member, and the Store_Entity property is set to Y, the currency translation results will also be copied into this Entity

• •

• •

•

88

Group_Currency is used to identify the currencies written to when running consolidation. Parent_Group is used to identify group members to be used in the Ownership Manager. This is specified in the Ownership Model setting: Parent/Child Property Used for the Hierarchy of Groups Stage_Only is used to control the storage of currency translation by group and base level members Store_Entity can be used to write elimination entries to different members. The results of currency translation can also be copied to the Entity ID in the Entity property above Store_Group_Curr if set to N, currency translation results will only be written to group members


2011

BPC440


Audit Type Dimension This dimension tracks the origin of data for example. Note: You will use an audit type dimension called C_Datasrc in your labs.

Figure 65: Audit Type Dimension

The properties for Data Source type dimensions are defined as follows: • • • • • • • •

COPYOPENING - Use a value of Y to include it in balance carryforward DATASRC_STAGE is for multilevel staged consolidation, posting will be written to the member value stored in this property. DATASRC_TYPE is used to identify M - Manual , A - Automatic , and I Input members. Only A - Automatic can be used in business rules. DIMLIST can be used as a selection criterion in business rules. ENABLEJRN can be used to limit dimension members in journal entries. IS_CONSOL is used identify members to include in elimination runs. IS_CONVERTED is used to identify members to include in currency translation. OPENING_DATASRC can be used to identify a member for balance carryforward if different than the source. For example, use a unique member to write the results of balance carryforward to such as BCF_OPENING.

Time Dimension The Time dimension defines whether you will use a normal monthly fiscal calendar or a different fiscal calendar.

2011


89


BPC440

Figure 66: Time Dimension

The properties for Time type dimensions are defined as follows: • • •

• • •

BASE_PERIOD is a new property. LEVEL is used to designate the time granularity such as month, quarter, and year. MONTHNUM is used to identify the 1st month of the fiscal year such as 1 for January, 2 for February, and so on. If the 1st period of the fiscal calender is April, then its monthnum will be 1, and so on. PERIOD is used for reporting purposes. TIMEID is either manually maintained or loaded automatically. Consolidation reads this property to determine the current vs. prior month. YEAR is used for reporting.

Some of the other dimensions, such as the O_ACCT dimension, will be covered in the Ownership discussion. The input currency dimension has all of your currencies and designates which ones are to be used for reporting as well as whether they are direct or indirect rates. The R_ACCT is used to store the AVG and END rate types for example.

Hierarchies Hierarchies are used for roll ups and expansions during reporting and also for data selections.

90


2011

BPC440


Figure 67: Modeling Hierarchies in Planning and Consolidation

Note: All master data in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation is time independent including hierarchies. This means that hierarchy data represents the latest parent and child relationships. It is natural to have hierarchies for dimensions such as entity and time where the need for roll-ups is common. Hierarchies also allow the use of multiple views from one dimension. For example, the entity (such as Store) dimension can be used to view data by company code, plant, or region. Hierarchies are stored as SAP NetWeaver BW Hierarchies.

Referencing Dimensions Referencing Dimensions are used to validate property values via table look ups. A member in one dimension is a property value in another. For example, an entity can only have a local currency such as EUR if it exists in the referenced currency dimension. Below you can see the dimension types that can be referenced. • • •

Account Dimension - an account can only use a RateType such as AVG if it exists in the referenced dimension Entity Dimension - an Entity can only use a Currency such as EUR if it exists in the referenced dimension Intercompany Dimension - an Intercompany member can only be linked to an Entity member if it exists in the referenced dimension Note: There are only four dimension types that can be referenced. (see below)

2011


91


BPC440

Referencing Dimensions Dimension

Ref Type

Property

Validation

A - Account

Account

Rate Type

End, Avg rates, and so on

C - Category

Time

Year

See note

E - Entity

Currency

Currency

Local Currency

I - Inter Company

Entity

Entity

Trading Partner

Note: Category is referenced to the time dimension. Example: if planning on category member Plan2012 the system can be set up so that values could not be entered for 2013.

Maintaining Dimensions When entering members into a Dimension, they can either be Saved to a file in the database or they can be Saved and Processed to both the file on the database as well as the BW database.

Figure 68:

92


2011

BPC440


Here are some member examples that you will use during the class. • • • • • • • • •

2011

Account examples include: Balance sheet, Income Statement, and Cash Flow. Rate (Currency) examples include AVG, END, and HIST. OwnAccount consists of ownership elimination methods as well as percent control and percent ownership. Flow examples include Opening, Increases, Decreases, Closing, Prior/Current period profit, Currency Translation, Ownership. Entity examples include legal entities such as C1000 and groups such as H1, CG1, CG2. RateEntity examples include: Global. This is the entity type dimension of the Rate application. Inter Company examples include I_C1000 so company C1000 has an alias (trading partner) IntCo I_C1000. Group examples include: G_H1, G_CG1, G_CG2; In this case Group is being used for consolidation group IDs. Audit ID is used to identify the origin of values for example: Input, MJ (Manual Journals), AJ (Automatic Journals), Elim (Consolidation Eliminations), and so on.


93


94


BPC440

2011

BPC440

87


Exercise 2: Maintain Dimensions for Consolidation Exercise Duration: 40 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create new dimensions • Add dimension members • Create hierarchies • Add consolidation properties

Business Example You need to set up your dimensions for legal consolidation.

Task 1: Open dimensions in administration. 1.

Open Administration for your BPC440_## environment.

2.

Go to the Dimensions screen.

Task 2: Create the C_ACCT dimension. 1.

Create the C_ACCT dimension with the description Consolidation Accounts.

2.

Activate referential integrity to the R_ACCT dimension.

3.

Add required consolidation properties.

4.

Add the custom properties listed below. Property ID

Description

Length

DIMLIST

Dimlist

5

DIMLIST1

Dimlist1

5


2011


95


BPC440

DIMLIST2

Dimlist2

5

ELIMACC

ElimAcc

10

GROUP

Group

2

Note: Dimlist properties are used to select groups of accounts in the business rules. Elimacc is used for US Eliminations (managerial). Group will be used in our sample balanced logic to select PL vs. BS accounts. 5.

Create the C_ACCT hierarchy called COA. Note: COA stands for chart of accounts.

6.

Add the provided course files to your folder on the remote computer.

7.

Add members to the new C_ACCT dimension from the C_ACCT file.

8.

Save and process the master data in the database. Take the environment offline.

Task 3: Create the Company dimension. 1.

Create the Company dimension with the description Legal Entity.

2.

Activate referential integrity to the Input Currency dimension.

3.

Add consolidation properties.

4.


Description

Length

OWNER

Owner

50

REVIEWER

Reviewer

50

US_ELIM

US_ELIM

1

5.

Create the Investment hierarchy.

6.

Add members to the new dimension from the provided COMPANY file.

7.

Add your BPC440-## user ID to both owner and reviewer for all members (1-17).

8.

Save and process the master data inthe database. Continued on next page

96


2011

BPC440


Task 4: Add members to the C_DATASRC dimension. 1.

Open the C_DATASRC dimension member sheet.

2.

Enter the four new members as shown below. Copy the property values from AJ_Shares. MemberID

Description

AJ_COI1

Automatic Entry COI1

AJ_COI2


AJ_COI3


AJ_USELIM

Automatic Entry US Elim

Hint: AJ = automatic journal. COI = Consolidation of Investment. 3.

2011

Save and process the master data in the database.


97


BPC440

Solution 2: Maintain Dimensions for Consolidation Task 1: Open dimensions in administration. 1.

Open Administration for your BPC440_## environment. a)

On the Web client Home tab, choose the Start Page and select Planning and Consolidation Administration. The Administration tab is created.

2.

Go to the Dimensions screen. a)

Choose Dimensions and Models→ Dimensions.

Figure 69: Dimensions

The dimensions for the BPC440_## environment are displayed.


98


2011

BPC440


Task 2: Create the C_ACCT dimension. 1.

Create the C_ACCT dimension with the description Consolidation Accounts. a)

Under Dimensions, choose New. The New Dimension dialog box opens.

b)

Enter values as shown below:

Figure 70: Create New C_ACCT Dimension

c)

Choose Create. The Structure of Dimension C_ACCT opens.

2.

Activate referential integrity to the R_ACCT dimension. a)

Next to Referential Integrity for RATETYPE, choose R_ACCT from the dropdown list. This means that rate types in the C_ACCT dimension cannot be used unless they first exist in the R_ACCT dimension. Examples include AVG - average and END - month end rate.


2011


99


3.

BPC440

Add required consolidation properties. a)

Under Properties, choose Add → Required Properties for Consolidation.

Figure 71: Initial Structure of C_ACCT

The system adds the TYPELIM property for you. 4.


Description

Length

DIMLIST

Dimlist

5

DIMLIST1

Dimlist1

5


100


2011

BPC440


DIMLIST2

Dimlist2

5

ELIMACC

ElimAcc

10

GROUP

Group

2

Note: Dimlist properties are used to select groups of accounts in the business rules. Elimacc is used for US Eliminations (managerial). Group will be used in our sample balanced logic to select PL vs. BS accounts. a)

Under Properties, select Add →New property.

b)

Enter the values for Dimlist as shown below:

Figure 72: Add New Property

c)

Choose OK.

d)

Repeat the above steps for Dimlist1, Dimlist2, Elimacc, and Group.

e)

Choose Save. The dimension is created.


2011


101


5.

BPC440

Create the C_ACCT hierarchy called COA. Note: COA stands for chart of accounts. a)

Under Hierarchies, select Add. The New Hierarchy dialog box opens.

b)

Next to Name: enter COA, then choose OK → Save.

Figure 73: Completed C_ACCT Structure

The completed structure is displayed as shown above. 6.

Add the provided course files to your folder on the remote computer. a)

From the Remote Desktop, in the Start menu, choose Programs → Initialize Course → RKTBPC10 → Initialize BPC440.

b)

When prompted, choose Yes and then choose OK.

c)

From the Remote Desktop, in the Start menu, select My documents → My documents. The My documents window opens.

d)

Open the BPC440 folder and copy the 10.0 Files folder.

e)

Paste it into your BPC440_## folder.


102


2011

BPC440


7.

Add members to the new C_ACCT dimension from the C_ACCT file. a)

Open the C_ACCT file and copy the members in A:2 to L:46.

b)

On the upper right of the Web client, choose Members of Dimension. The member sheet is displayed

c)

At the intersection of row 1 and ID, right click and choose Paste.

Figure 74: Members of C_ACCT

The sheet is filled. 8.

Save and process the master data in the database. Take the environment offline. a)

Choose Save and Process. The Process Dimension dialog box is displayed.

b)

Choose Yes to take the environment offline.

c)

Choose Close.


2011


103


BPC440

Task 3: Create the Company dimension. 1.

Create the Company dimension with the description Legal Entity. a)

Under Dimensions, chooseNew. Enter values as shown:

Figure 75: Create New Company Dimension

b) 2.

Choose Create.

Activate referential integrity to the Input Currency dimension. a)

Next to Referential Integrity for: CURRENCY, select INPUTCURRENCY from the dropdown list. This will force data validation for currency values for company IDs. Now they must exist first in the input currency dimension.

3.

Add consolidation properties. a)

Under Properties, choose Add → Required properties for consolidation. The system adds the ELIM, FXTYPE, and INTCO properties for you.

4.

Add the custom properties listed below.


104


2011

BPC440


Property ID

Description

Length

OWNER

Owner

50

REVIEWER

Reviewer

50

US_ELIM

US_ELIM

1

a)

Under Properties, select Add → New Property. The Add New Property dialog box opens.

b)

Enter the values for Owner as shown above.

c)

Choose OK.

d)

Repeat the above steps for Reviewer. Owner is used by the work status to look up the user(s) who can perform an activity given the work state, for example. Reviewer is used in business process flows to look up who the reviewer is for a given company ID.

e)

Choose Save. The new properties have been added.

Figure 76: Completed Company Structure


2011


105


5.

BPC440

Create the Investment hierarchy. a)

Under Hierarchies, choose Add. The New Hierarchy dialog box opens.

b)

Next to Name:, enter Investment and choose OK. Your structure should look like the one above.

c) 6.

Choose Save.

Add members to the new dimension from the provided COMPANY file. a)

In the BPC440_## folder, open the COMPANY file and copy the members (not including row one).

b)

In the Web client, select Members of Dimension: COMPANY.

c)

At the intersection of row 1 and ID:, right click and choose Paste.

Figure 77: Members of Company

7.

8.

Add your BPC440-## user ID to both owner and reviewer for all members (1-17). a)

At the intersection of row 1 and Owner, enter BPC440-##.

b)

Copy and paste properties for rows 1-17 to both owner and reviewer.

Save and process the master data inthe database. a)

Under Administration of BPC440_##, select Save and Process. The Process Dimension dialog box is displayed.

b)

Choose YES to take the environment offline.

c)

Choose Close.


106


2011

BPC440


Task 4: Add members to the C_DATASRC dimension. 1.

Open the C_DATASRC dimension member sheet. a)

Select the C_DATASRC hypertext. The member sheet is opened.

2.

Enter the four new members as shown below. Copy the property values from AJ_Shares. MemberID

Description

AJ_COI1


AJ_COI2


AJ_COI3


AJ_USELIM

Automatic Entry US Elim

Hint: AJ = automatic journal. COI = Consolidation of Investment. a)

Select row 16: Right click → Copy

b)

Select rows 26-29: Right Click → Paste

c)

In rows 26-9, enter theID and Description as shown below:

Figure 78: New C_Datasrc Members


2011


107


3.

BPC440

Save and process the master data in the database. a)

Under Administration of BPC440_##, select Save and Process. The Process Dimension dialog box is displayed.

b)

Choose YES to take the environment offline.

c)

Choose Close. These new members will be used when you perform ownership elimination and US elimination.

108


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe Environments • Create Dimensions • Add Properties • Create Hierarchies

2011


109


Lesson: 102

BPC440

Creating Models for Consolidation Lesson Duration: 35 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn about model types, and how to create models.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Create models for legal consolidation Explain the Model Types Describe how Models reference each other

Focus on the consolidation related aspects of Models.

Business Example You need to set up SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation to do Legal Consolidation and you are interested in how to configure the Models.

Model Types Note: There are six different types of Models in two general categories: Model Types

110

General Category

Model Type

Main Use

Reporting

Standard

Planning with no currency translation

Financial

Planning with currency translation

Consolidation

Consolidation with currency translation and elimination


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Creating Models for Consolidation

Drivers and Rates

Rates

Store exchanges rates for planning and consolidation

Ownership

Store Ownership data

Generic

Store cost drivers, and so on

When creating a new Model, you have the six types to select from.

Figure 79: Model Types

Note: Data Entry Mode controls whether data is stored on a monthly or year to date (cumulative) basis. All six Model Types can be reported on via the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in.

Setting up Consolidation Models A consolidation Environment requires at least 3 and perhaps 4 Models. • • • •

Consolidation - Main Model containing the financial transaction data Ownership - Used to manage the organizational structure, method assignments, and percent control/ownership Rate - Contains currency exchange rates Intercompany Matching - This optional Financial Type Model adds complexity but may make it easier to control data access

A typical project would have the following Models with these Dimensions.

2011


111


BPC440

Dimensions by Model

Legal

Ownership

Rate

Inter Company Matching

Account

x

x

x

x

Audit (Datasource)

x

Category

x

Currency

x

Entity

x

x

Group

x

x

x

Intercompany

x

x

x

Sub-tables (Flow)

x

Time

x

Dimension Type

x x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

When creating a new Model these four dimension types must be included for any Model type: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Category Account Time Entity

When creating a Finance type Model, Currency is also required. When creating a Consolidation type Model, Currency, Audit, Group, and Intercompany are also required. When creating an Ownership type Model, Group and Intercompany are also required. Note: Only the User-defined dimension type may be used more than once per Model. When creating a Model, the dimensions in the Environment appear under Available Dimensions. You can add them to your Model by adding to Selected Dimensions. At least one dimension must be set as Secured.

112


2011

BPC440


Figure 80: Selecting Dimensions for a Model

When creating an ownership type model, there are two unique selections: 1. 2.

The Non-Interco Member in Ownership contains the Intercompany member to which all calculations are posted. The Parent / child property used for the hierarchy of groups contains the property in the group type dimension that will be used to form the ownership hierarchy that is used in the Ownership Manager.

Figure 81: Ownership general settings

2011


113


BPC440

Referencing Models Depending on the type, Models are referenced to each other. • •

Financial Models are referenced to a Rate Model Consolidation Models are referenced to a Rate Model and an Ownership Model

Data Entry Mode Models can be set to store either Periodic or YTD cumulative data upon creation. Either option can be used for the Consolidation Model. After a Model is created, this setting cannot be changed. Note: If you are loading cumulative data each period and you want to include prior period adjustments, you should set the Model to YTD. Either periodic or year to date data can be stored in the Model. The Measure dimension can be used however to view the data regardless of how it is stored. For example, if year to date data is stored, the periodic measure will simply calculate the period values by subtracting the values of the prior period from the current period.

Figure 82: A Model with YTD Data Entry Mode

114


2011

BPC440


Here are the criteria to decide which Data Entry Mode to use: • • • •

2011

Does your data source have periodic or cumulative data? Do you import YTD data that may include adjustments to prior period data? If you use a YTD Model, you may need to copy journal entries from one month to the next Are most of your reports run in YTD mode?


115


BPC440

How to Create a Model 108

1.

Goto Administration → Models → New

2.

Enter an ID and Description

3.

Select the Model type and Data Entry Mode

4.

Select whether to copy from an existing Model or not

5.

Choose the dimensions and make at least one secure Note: To be able to use the new Model in the EPM add-in, add your new Model to a Data Access Profile

Security There are four components of security. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Users - Who Teams - What groups of users Task Profiles - What activities can you perform Data Access Profiles - What data can you read or write to

Work Status • • • •

Work Status is used to control changes to data in a Model (such as closing the period) You must have work status turned on to use Controls Work States are defined at the Environment level Work Status is turned on by Model Note: The illustration below is conceptual.

In the example below, the entity dimension is used to determine the owners, reviewers, and managers for Store1. So for Store1, Joe is the owner, Nicole is the reviewer, and Pete is the Manager. The User Actions is the sequence of activities in this example. When Joe submits Step4, Nicole is notified via e-mail and she accepts it. Since Pete is the manager of Store1, he can set the work state to Reviewed and then Approved. If the work state is Reviewed for example, no one can run a Data Manager package for that data region since it is Locked.

116


2011

BPC440


The work state options are defined as follows. • • • •

All - All users are allowed to perform the activity Locked - Users are Locked out of that activity Owner - Only the Owner can perform the activity Manager - Only the Manager can perform the activity

Status Controlled By determines who can change the work state. In the example below, the Manager can advance the work state to Approved and back to Reviewed. The Work status interfaces are the methods that users can save data or documents to the database. They are defined as follows: • • • • •

Data Manager - running Data Manager packages Journals - posting journal entries Manual - manually entering and saving data Documents - posting document attachments Comments - saving comments to the database

Figure 83: Work Status

2011


117


BPC440

Figure 84: Owners and Managers

Figure 85: Turning on Work Status

118


2011

BPC440

111


Exercise 3: Create Consolidation Models Exercise Duration: 50 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create models for consolidation • Discuss the required dimensions • Activate secure dimensions • Allow access to the model via security • Identify the purpose of the model parameters

Business Example After you have identified the business requirements for a legal consolidation, you need to set up the necessary models with the appropriate settings.

Task 1: Create the Ownership model. 1.

In your BPC440_## environment., create the Ownership model. Name it OWNERSHIP with the description Ownership Model.

2.

Select the Ownership model type and confirm the Data Entry Mode of Periodic.

3.

Copy metadata from the rates model.

4.

Use the following dimensions in the Ownership model. Dimension

Secured

Company

Yes

Consgroup C_Category Intco O_acct Time 5.

Edit the Ownership model and configure the general settings. ChooseI_NONE for the Non-Interco Member in Ownership and PARENT_GROUP for the parent/child property for the hierarchy of groups. Continued on next page

2011


119


BPC440

Task 2: Create the Legal model. 1.

Create the Legal model. Name it LEGAL with the description Legal Model.

2.

Choose the Consolidation model type and select the Data Entry Mode of YTD.

3.

Copy metadata from the Expense model.

4.

Use the following dimensions in the Legal model. Dimension

Secured

Company

Yes

Consgroup C_acct C_category C_datasrc Flow Intco Rptcurrency Time 5.

Edit the Legal model and view the general settings.

Task 3: Create the ICMatching model. 1.

Create the ICMatching model. Name it ICMATCHING with the description IC Matching Model.

2.

Choose the Financial model type and select the Data Entry Mode of YTD.

3.

Copy metadata from the Expense model.

4.

Use the following dimensions in the ICMatching model. Dimension

Secured

Company

Yes

Consgroup C_category Flow Continued on next page

120


2011

BPC440


ICAccount ICDatasrc Intco Rptcurrency Time

Task 4: Configure the data access profiles for your new models. 1.

Go to the Security section of the Web client.

2.

Open the definition of the Full data access profile.

3.

Grant write access to all members for ICMatching.

Task 5: Activate work status for the Legal model. You must have work status activated to use Controls.

2011

1.

Open the work status configuration table in Administration.

2.

Enable Data Locking for your Legal model. The Driver Dimension is Company and the Other Dimensions are C_Category and Time.


121


BPC440

Solution 3: Create Consolidation Models Task 1: Create the Ownership model. 1.

In your BPC440_## environment., create the Ownership model. Name it OWNERSHIP with the description Ownership Model. a)

On the Web client Home tab on the Start Page, choose Planning and Consolidation Administration.

b)

Choose Dimensions and Models → Models.

Figure 86: Initial Models List

Your Expense and Rates models are displayed c)

Under Models, select New. The New Model dialog box opens to step 1 Name and Description.

d)

Enter the ID OWNERSHIP.

e)

Enter the description Ownership Model.

f)

Choose Next. Step 2 Model Type opens.


122


2011

BPC440


2.

Select the Ownership model type and confirm the Data Entry Mode of Periodic. a)

Under Drivers and Rates, select Ownership.

b)

Next to Data Entry Mode, confirm the existing value of PER - Periodic.

Figure 87: Ownership Type

c)

Next Step 3 Source Model opens.

3.

Copy metadata from the rates model. a)

Choose An Existing Model.

b)

Choose the Rates model. This will copy Excel templates, Data Manager packages, and will also provide a default list of dimensions to select from in the next step.

c)

Choose Next. Step 4 Dimensions opens. The Available Dimensions and Selected Dimensions appear.

4.

Use the following dimensions in the Ownership model. Dimension

Secured

Company

Yes

Consgroup C_Category


2011


123


BPC440

Intco O_acct Time a)

In Selected Dimensions, choose Ctrl - A → Remove. Note: You do not need to remove the default dimensions, but you gain a clearer overview this way.

Figure 88: Ownership with No Dimensions

b)

in Available Dimensions, choose Company.. Then choose Add.

c)

Repeat the above step for the remaining dimensions. Hint: The dimensions can be in any order.

d)

In the Selected Dimensions, Secured column, select Company.


124


2011

BPC440


Figure 89: Ownership Dimensions

Company will be used to control data access. e)

Choose Next. Step 5 Copy from Source opens.

f)

Choose Next. Step 6 Review and Create opens, and the selected dimensions are displayed.

g)

Choose Create. The new Mmodel is created.

h)

Choose Close.


2011


125


5.

BPC440

Edit the Ownership model and configure the general settings. ChooseI_NONE for the Non-Interco Member in Ownership and PARENT_GROUP for the parent/child property for the hierarchy of groups. a)

Choose the Ownership model (in blue hypertext).

b)

Next to Non-Interco Member in Ownership, select I_NONE.

c)

Choose OK.

d)

Next to Parent/child property used for hierarchy of groups, select PARENT_GROUP.

Figure 90: Ownership General Settings

The Non-Interco Member in Ownership property contains the intercompany member to which all calculations are posted. The Parent / Child Property Used for the Hierarchy of Groups property contains the group type dimension property that will be used to form the ownership hierarchy. e)

Choose Save.

f)

Choose Close.


126


2011

BPC440


Task 2: Create the Legal model. 1.

Create the Legal model. Name it LEGAL with the description Legal Model. a)

Under Models, choose New. The New Model dialog box opens to step 1 Name and Description.

b)

Next to ID, enter LEGAL.

c)

Next to Description, enter Legal Model.

d)


2.

Choose the Consolidation model type and select the Data Entry Mode of YTD. a)

Under Reporting, choose Consolidation.

b)

Next to Data Entry Mode, select YTD - Year to Date. Note: Either periodic or year-to-date data storage can be used. Some customers like to use YTD in scenarios where cumulative data is being imported, since this makes it easier when there are prior period adjustments in the source systems. Data will now be stored on a YTD basis.

c)

Choose Next. Step 3 Source Model opens.

3.

Copy metadata from the Expense model. a)


b)

Choose the Expense model. This will copy Excel templates, Data Manager packages, and will also provide a default list of dimensions to select from in the next step.

c)


4.

Use the following dimensions in the Legal model.


2011


127


BPC440

Dimension

Secured

Company

Yes

Consgroup C_acct C_category C_datasrc Flow Intco Rptcurrency Time a)


b)

in Available Dimensions, choose Company. Then choose Add.

c)

Repeat the above step for the remaining dimensions. Hint: The dimensions can be in any order.

d)

In the Selected Dimensions, Secured column, choose Company.


128


2011

BPC440


Figure 91: Legal Dimensions



f)


g)

Choose Create. The new model is created.

h) 5.

Choose Close.

Edit the Legal model and view the general settings. a)

Choose Legal (in blue hypertext).

b)

Note that the Exchange Rates will be accessed from the Rates model and the Scope Definitions, that is, ownership data will be accessed from the Ownership model.

Figure 92: Legal General Settings

c)

Choose Close.


2011


129


BPC440

Task 3: Create the ICMatching model. 1.

Create the ICMatching model. Name it ICMATCHING with the description IC Matching Model. a)

Under Models, choose New. The New Model dialog box opens to step 1 Name and Description.

b)

Next to ID, enter ICMATCHING.

c)

Next to Description, enter IC Matching Model.

d)


2.

Choose the Financial model type and select the Data Entry Mode of YTD. a)

Under Reporting, select Financial.

b)

Next to Data Entry Mode, select YTD - Year to Date. Data will now be stored on a YTD basis.

c)

Choose Next. Step 3 Source Model opens.

3.

Copy metadata from the Expense model. a)


b)

Choose the Expense mode.l

c)


4.

Use the following dimensions in the ICMatching model. Dimension

Secured

Company

Yes

Consgroup C_category Flow ICAccount ICDatasrc


130


2011

BPC440


Intco Rptcurrency Time a)


b)

In Available Dimensions, choose Company. Then choose Add.

c)

Repeat the above step for the remaining dimensions.

d)

In the Selected Dimensions, Secured column, choose Company.

Figure 93: ICMatching Dimensions



f)


g)

Choose Create. The new model is created.

h)

Choose Close. Continued on next page

2011


131


BPC440

Task 4: Configure the data access profiles for your new models. 1.

Go to the Security section of the Web client. a)

On the Administration tab, choose Security → Data Access Profiles. The Data Access Profiles screen opens.

2.

Open the definition of the Full data access profile. a)

Choose Full.

Figure 94: Full Profile Initial

Data Access Profile: Full is opened.


132


2011

BPC440


3.

Grant write access to all members for ICMatching. a)

Under Models, choose ICMatching.

b)

Under Members, select All members from the dropdown list.

c)

Under Access Rights, select Write from the dropdown list.

d)

Repeat these steps for the Legal model.

e)

Repeat these steps for the Ownership model.

Figure 95: Member Access Profile Complete

f)

Choose Save. Authorized users can now access these models in the Excel interface of the EPM.

g)

Choose Close.

Task 5: Activate work status for the Legal model. You must have work status activated to use Controls. 1.

Open the work status configuration table in Administration. a)

Choose Features → Work Status.


2011


133


2.

BPC440

Enable Data Locking for your Legal model. The Driver Dimension is Company and the Other Dimensions are C_Category and Time. a)

Under Data Locking Settings by Model, choose Settings for: Legal.

Figure 96: Activating Work Status

b)

Make the selections as shown above.

c)

Choose Save. Work status is now activated for the Legal model.

Facilitated Discussion Review a key design concept.

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. What two model types are referenced to a Consolidation type model?

134


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create models for legal consolidation • Explain the Model Types • Describe how Models reference each other

2011


135


Lesson: 128

BPC440

Creating Consolidation Logic Lesson Duration: 50 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will work with logic files used to pass parameters to the programs and also how to use logic for balancing.


Explain how to use the three types of logic Specify how logic is used to run consolidation tasks Identify examples of how to use balancing logic

Focus on the consolidation aspects of logic.

Business Example You are implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation and you need to know how to use logic to carry out consolidation tasks and to perform balancing.

The different types of logic In this section we will cover he different types of logic. Logic allows you to define formulas that perform calculations on members and data. You can have three different types of calculations: The Three Types of Logic

136

Type

Description

Front - End

Worksheet logic (Excel functions, EPM functions, VBA)

No

On The Fly

Dimension member formulas

No


Does it store results in database?

2011

BPC440

Lesson: Creating Consolidation Logic

Stored Output Script logic

Yes

Business rules

Yes

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)

Yes

Worksheet Calculations You can use worksheet formulas and macros to create a convenient launch pad to run jobs and to do analysis of the results. The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in includes functions that you can use. The EPM functions are available to retrieve specific information or data and to make a report behave in a certain way, providing power and flexibility. You can enter an EPM function directly in the formula bar. To make it easier to create and edit formulas and minimize typing and syntax errors, use Microsoft Office Excel Formula AutoComplete. After you type =epm (or =EPM, as it is not case-sensitive), a dynamic drop-down list of all the EPM functions is displayed below the cell. You can also use the Microsoft Office Excel standard Insert Function dialog box by clicking the Insert Function button from the EPM tab of the ribbon. The EPM dedicated functions are included in the EPMFunctions category.

Figure 97: EPM add-in Functions

To access the online help, go to Help.SAP.Com→ SAP BusinessObjects → EPM Solutions → Planning and Consolidation → SAP BusinessObjects EPM solutions, add-in for Microsoft Office 10.0

2011


137


BPC440

Dimension Member Logic Dimension logic, which is also known as member formulas, allows you to create and execute formulas and calculations on dimension members. Caution: Formulas can slow retrieval performance if you use them incorrectly. In the example below, there is a formula that could be used to calculate gross margin % on the fly.

Figure 98: Dimension Member Formula

Below you can see the result of the above formula. This value is calculated when the data is refreshed in a report and is not stored in the database.

Figure 99: Dimension Formula Result

Using logic to run business rules In this section, we will review how to use script logic to run business rules.

138


2011

BPC440


Script logic is defined within each Model and is used to calculate data and to run ABAP programs. Calculations defined for a specific member ID creates base level data in the Model. This is proprietary SQL logic not Microsoft SQL. In the architecture graphic below, the following steps occur: 1. 2. 3. 4.

The business user runs the Balance Carryforward package. It provides the member values for category, time, entity, and currency. The data is passed to the related process chain. (also used in BW for background processing) The Process Chain triggers the logic call. The Business Add-In is triggered. The associated dimensions and source/target accounts are read from the business rule table. Data is carried forward into the month/year specified.

Figure 100: The Architecture of Consolidation Tasks

The following logic is delivered with Planning and Consolidation. You can access the files in transaction code UFS.

2011


139


BPC440

The purpose of each logic file File

Purpose

Calcaccount.lgf

Calculate cash flow, or perform other reclassifications.

Consolidation.lgf

Intercompany eliminations, Consolidation of Investments. This logic is used only by a consolidation Data Manager package not the Consolidate function in the Consolidation Monitor.

Copy_Opening.lgf

Balance Carry Forward

Default.lgf

Any logic included here will be executed every time data is written to the Model via manual input or via the Data Manager

Fxtrans.lgf

Currency translation of Local to Group currency. This logic is used only by a consolidation Data Manager package not the Consolidate function in the Consolidation Monitor.

ICBooking.lgf

Booking inter company differences

ICData.lgf

Calculating partner data.

ICElim.lgf

US Elimination

Journal.lgf

Any logic included here will be executed every time data is written to the Model via a journal entry

Note: When the JOURNAL.LGF is used, the logic in the DEFAULT.LGF logic file will not be executed for journal entries. If a JOURNAL.LGF is not used, then the default logic file will be executed for journal entries. Basic Syntax: • • • • •

// denote comments. * indicates executable lines of code. %s denote system variables. # is used in MDX statements to denote the receiver of the calculation. MDX uses brackets [ ] while script does not.

If you would like to carry out a script logic calculation as data is being written to the Model, include it in the Default.LGF file. You can also reference logic in other files by using the following command: *INCLUDE

140


2011

BPC440


Figure 101: Default Logic Example

2011


141


BPC440

How to Include Logic in the Default Logic File 134

1.

In Administration , create a new logic file for your Model

2.

Add your code and save it

3.

Open the DEFAULT.LGF file

4. 5.

Reference new logic file from above by adding this line of code: *INCLUDE .LGF Save the file.

Using logic for balancing In this section we will review how to use logic for balancing. As data is imported into the Model, there is usually a need to keep the Income Statement and Balance Sheet in balance. For example Annual Net Income should equal Current Year Retained Earnings (CYRE). In the example below, the annual net income is transferred to the CYRE via the Move Account.

Figure 102: Balancing Concept

142


2011

BPC440


In the following example, data is entered into a revenue account and the logic books an offsetting entry into retained earnings. Note: The acronyms above are defined as follows: • • • • • • • • •

REV = Revenue COGS = Cost of Goods Sold GM = Gross Margin Other EXP = Other Expense L = Liabilities A = Assets OE = Owners Equity PYRE = Prior Year Retained Earnings COM STOCK = Common Stock

Figure 103: Annual Net Income to Retained Earnings Example

Below you can see two possible outcomes when opening balance plus changes do not equal closing balance. In the example for Machinery and Equipment, the variance goes to an error flow. In the example for Third Party Payables, the variance goes to the F_VAR Variation flow.

2011


143


BPC440

Figure 104: Open and Ending Balance Example

A good way to test the default logic is to use a simple input template. Since the default logic is run on a real time basis, whenever data in input you can see the results right away. When data is entered into the Income Statement, the following logic will perform a write into the appropriate Balance Sheet account and flow. Now we have some sample logic to test for financial balancing. *XDIM_MEMBERSET FLOW=BAS(F_TOT) This reads the opening balance plus changes values into memory. *XDIM_ADDMEMBERSET FLOW=F_CB This reads the F_CB closing balance values into memory. *XDIM_MEMBERSET INTCO=I_NONE This reads the I_NONE member values into memory. *WHEN C_ACCT.GROUP When accounts with a group property value of ... *IS PL Is PL Profit and Loss, Sum those accounts *WHEN FLOW When the Flow dimension *IS F_CB Is F_CB Closing Balance *WHEN INTCO When the Intco dimension *IS I_NONE Is I_NONE *REC(C_ACCT=25712000,FLOW=F_RES,INTCO=I_NONE) Record the value into 25712000 for F_RES and I_NONE *REC(C_ACCT=25712000,FLOW=F_CB,INTCO=I_NONE) Record the value into 25712000 for F_CB and I_NONE *ENDWHEN *ENDWHEN

144


2011

BPC440


*ENDWHEN

[FLOW].[#F_VAR]=IIF([C_ACCT].CURRENTMEMBER.PROPERTIES(DIMLIST1)=L1 If the Dimlist property is L1_V Then: Variance = Closing Balance - Opening Balance - Acquisitions + Returns, otherwise it is zero *COMMIT [FLOW].[#F_ERR] =IIF([C_ACCT].CURRENTMEMBER.PROPERTIES(DIMLIST1)=L1_E,[FLOW].[F_CB If the Dimlist property is L1_E, Then: Error = Closing Balance - Opening Balance - Acquisitions + Returns, otherwise it is zero *COMMIT You can also use logic that only applies to incoming data via Journal Entries by adding script to a file named JOURNAL.LGF. Additionally, whenever the JOURNAL.LGF is used, the logic in the DEFAULT.LGF logic file will not be called for journal entries. Here is an example of a journal logic file.

Figure 105: Journal Logic Example

2011


145


BPC440

In the example above, this is the explanation: • • • • • • • •

Line 4-6 The data for the YTD measure and all flows and all account is read into memory. Line 8-9 Add C_ACCTs with a property of INC Income Line 10 Record that value *1 into 25712000 Retained Earnings F_RES Result for the Period Line 11 Record that value *1 into 25712000 Retained Earnings F_CB Result for the Period Line 12 Otherwise, continue Line 13-14 Add C_ACCTs with a property of EXP Expense Line 15 Record that value * -1 into 25712000 Retained Earnings F_RES Result for the Period Line 16 Record that value * -1 into 25712000 Retained Earnings F_CB Result for the Period

• Note: Here is another example of journal logic that you could use to balance your flows: *WHEN FLOW.PARENTH1 *IS F_TOT *REC(FACTOR = 1,FLOW = F_CB) *ENDWHEN *COMMIT F_TOT includes the opening balance as well as increases and decreases. The system adds those up and writes the total into the closing balance.

146


2011

BPC440

139


Exercise 4: Create Consolidation Logic Files Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create the logic files required for legal consolidation.

Business Example There are several components that consolidation tasks use such as business rules, Data Manager packages, dimensions, and logic files. In this exercise, you will set up the logic files.

Task 1: Create the logic files for ICMatching. Caution: The logic file names must be used as instructed, since they are in the delivered packages. 1.

Open the logic scripts for your environment.

2.

Add the FXTRANS file in ICMatching.

3.

Add the ICDATA file in ICMatching.

4.

Add the ICBOOKING file in ICMatching.

Task 2: Create the script logic for your Legal model.

2011

1.

Add the FXTRANS file in Legal.

2.

Add the CALCACCOUNT file in Legal.

3.

Add the CONSOLIDATION file in Legal.

4.

Add the COPY_OPENING file in Legal.

5.

Add the ICELIM file in Legal.


147


BPC440

Solution 4: Create Consolidation Logic Files Task 1: Create the logic files for ICMatching. Caution: The logic file names must be used as instructed, since they are in the delivered packages. 1.

Open the logic scripts for your environment. a)

In the Web client on the Start Page, choose Planning and Consolidation: Administration.

b)

Choose Rules → Logic Scripts:

Figure 106: Logic Scripts

2.

Add the FXTRANS file in ICMatching. a)

Left click Scripts for: ICMatching → New

b)

Enter FXTRANS and choose Create. The Logic Script of ICMatching logic editor opens.

c)

In your remote desktop, choose Start → My documents → My documents.

d)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_##.

e)

Open ICM FXTRANS.

f)

Press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.. Continued on next page

148


2011

BPC440


All of the script is selected and copied to your clipboard. g)

In the logic editor, right click and Paste → Save.

Figure 107: FXTRANS for ICMatching

Note: We will use this file to translate local currency into the USD reporting currency. The curr_conversion program is delivered. The %dimension_set% are system variables that the user provides when executing the Data Manager package. Global is the only entity in the rate model and is therefore set as a constant. h)

Choose Close → Return to Logic Scripts.


2011


149


3.

BPC440

Add the ICDATA file in ICMatching. a)

Left click Scripts for: ICMatching and choose New.

b)

Enter ICDATA and choose Create. The Logic Script of ICMatching logic editor opens.

c)

Go to your BPC440_## folder.

d)

Open ICM ICDATA and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

e)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. You will use this file to copy intercompany ap/ar into unique datasrc IDs for reconciliation.

f)

Choose Close.


150


2011

BPC440


4.

Add the ICBOOKING file in ICMatching. a)

Choose New and enterICBOOKING. Choose Create. The Logic Script of ICMatching logic editor opens.

b)


c)

Open ICM ICBOOKING and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

d)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. This logic will be used to book any differences for your intercompany accounts payable/accounts receivable.

e)

Choose Close.

Figure 108: Scripts for ICMatching

You should have these files. f)

Choose Return to Logic Scripts.


2011


151


BPC440

Task 2: Create the script logic for your Legal model. 1.

Add the FXTRANS file in Legal. a)

Left click Scripts for: Legal and choose New. Enter FXTRANS and choose Create. The Logic Script of Legal logic editor opens.

b)


c)

Open LEG FXTRANS and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

d)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. You will use this file to translate local currency into the USD reporting currency.

e) 2.

Choose Close.

Add the CALCACCOUNT file in Legal. a)

Choose New, enter CALCACCOUNT, and choose Create.

b)


c)

Open LEG CALCACCOUNT and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

d)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. This logic will be used later in a cash flow calculation.

e) 3.

Choose Close.

Add the CONSOLIDATION file in Legal. a)

Choose New.

b)

Enter CONSOLIDATION and choose Create.

c)


d)

Open LEG CONSOLIDATION and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

e)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. This logic will be used to translate group currency values and also to perform eliminations based on the Eliminations and Adjustments business rule when executed from the Data Manager.

f)

Choose Close.


152


2011

BPC440


4.

Add the COPY_OPENING file in Legal. a)

Choose New.

b)

Enter COPY_OPENING and choose Create.

c)


d)

Open LEG COPY_OPENING and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

e)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. This logic will be used to run balance carryforward.

f)

Choose Close.


2011


153


5.

BPC440

Add the ICELIM file in Legal. a)

Choose New.

b)

EnterICELIM and choose Create.

c)


d)

Open LEG ICELIM and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

e)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. This logic will be used to run the US Elim (managerial) elimination.

f)

Choose Close You should have these files:

Figure 109: Scripts for Legal

g)

154

Choose Return to Logic Scripts.


2011

BPC440

147


Exercise 5: Create Balancing Logic Exercise Duration: 25 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create logic files to perform financial statement balancing.

Business Example You need a way to create offsetting entries to keep your income statement in balance with the balance sheet. You also need a way to generate an error flow when opening balances and changes do not equal closing balances.

Task 1: Create a logic file in Legal for balancing purposes. 1.

Open the logic scripts for your environment.

2.

Add the BALANCING file in Legal.

3.

Include the balancing logic in the default logic file so that it will execute every time data is input or imported.

4.

Change your environment status to online.

Task 2: Test the balancing logic in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1.

Open the EPM add-in.

2.


Member

Company

C1000 - Germany

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct

1 - Balance Sheet Accounts

C_Category

PLAN - Plan

C_Datasrc

INPUT - Company Input

Flow

F_TOT - End of Period Movement

Intco

I_None - No Intercompany


2011


155


BPC440

Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

3.

Open the BPC440 Logic Test input schedule from your BPC440_## folder.

4.

Enter the values as shown below and save the data to trigger the balancing calculations.

5.

Account ID

Account Description

F_CB

F_OB

30110000

Revenue

125

12110300

Buildings

125

50

21121000

Accounts Payable

125

50

Confirm your results.

Figure 110: Balancing Logic Result

Note: The system may generate a zero for 21121000 and F_ERR, for example.

156

6.

Save the template.

7.

Open the BPC440 Control Test input schedule and save it to the Company folder. You will use this template in a later exercise.

8.

Deactivate the balancing logic by commenting out the include statement.


2011

BPC440


Solution 5: Create Balancing Logic Task 1: Create a logic file in Legal for balancing purposes. 1.

2.

Open the logic scripts for your environment. a)

In the Web client on the Start Page, choose Planning and Consolidation: Administration.

b)

Choose Rules → Logic Scripts:

Add the BALANCING file in Legal. a)

Left click Scripts for: Legal and choose New.

b)

Enter BALANCING and choose Create. The Logic Script of Legal logic editor opens.

c)

In your remote desktop, choose Start → My documents → My documents.

d)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_##.

e)

Open LEG BALANCING and press Ctrl A followed by Ctrl C.

f)

In the logic editor, right click and choose Paste → Save. Now we have some sample logic to test for financial balancing. Note: *XDIM_MEMBERSET FLOW=BAS(F_TOT) This reads the opening balance plus changes values into memory. *XDIM_ADDMEMBERSET FLOW=F_CB This reads the F_CB closing balance values into memory. *XDIM_MEMBERSET INTCO=I_NONE This reads the I_NONE member values into memory. *WHEN C_ACCT.GROUP When accounts with a group property value of *IS PL is PL Profit and Loss, sum those accounts. *WHEN FLOW When the Flow dimension *IS F_CB is F_CB Closing Balance *WHEN INTCO When the Intco dimension *IS I_NONE Continued on next page

2011


157


BPC440

is I_NONE *REC(C_ACCT=25712000,FLOW=F_RES,INTCO=I_NONE) Record the value into 25712000 for F_RES and I_NONE *REC(C_ACCT=25712000,FLOW=F_CB,INTCO=I_NONE) Record the value into 25712000 for F_CB and I_NONE *ENDWHEN *ENDWHEN *ENDWHEN

[FLOW].[#F_VAR]=IIF([C_ACCT].CURRENTMEMBER.PROPERTIES(DI If the Dimlist property is L1_V Then: Variance = Closing Balance - Opening Balance Acquisitions + Returns, otherwise it is zero *COMMIT [FLOW].[#F_ERR] =IIF([C_ACCT].CURRENTMEMBER.PROPERTIES(DIMLIST1)=L1_E,[F If the Dimlist property is L1_E, Then: Error = Closing Balance - Opening Balance Acquisitions + Returns, otherwise it is zero *COMMIT g) 3.

Choose Close.

Include the balancing logic in the default logic file so that it will execute every time data is input or imported. a)

Choose Default.LGF. The logic editor opens.

b)

In row 2, enter the following code:

*INCLUDE BALANCING.LGF

Choose Save → Close → Return to Logic Scripts.


158


2011

BPC440


4.

Change your environment status to online. a)

Choose Manage All Environments.

b)

If your environment status is Offline, highlight it and choose Change Status → Online → OK.

Figure 111: Setting the Environment Status to Online

c)

Choose Back to Administration: followed by Home → Start Page .

Task 2: Test the balancing logic in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1.

Open the EPM add-in. a)

On the Web client Start Page, select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens.

b)

Choose Create.

c)



2011


159


BPC440

Figure 112: Create Connection

d)

Choose Connect.

e)

Enter your user ID and password to create the connection

f)

User ID

Password

BPC-##

training

Choose Logon. Environments and models are loaded.

g)

h)

Use the dropdown box to select the environment and model. Environment

Model

BPC440_##

Legal

Choose Generate Connection Name. The system will generate a connection name made up of the Model ID - Environment ID

i)

Click OK twice.

j)

Enter your user ID and password to access the EPM add-in for your environment and model. Continued on next page

160


2011

BPC440


k)

User ID

Password

User ID

Password

BPC-##

training

Choose Logon. The EPM pane appears on the right.

2.


Member

Company

C1000 - Germany

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct


C_Category

PLAN - Plan

C_Datasrc


Flow

F_TOT - End of Period Movement

Intco

I_None - No Intercompany

Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a)

In the EPM Context field for Company, choose Select Other Members... from the dropdown list. The EPM - Member Selector is displayed. Hint: You may need to maximize your screen to see the OK button in the next step.

3.

b)

Choose C1000 - Germany and OK.

c)

Set your other members as listed above.

Open the BPC440 Logic Test input schedule from your BPC440_## folder. a)

On the upper left, choose Office and then Open.

b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Logic Test → Open.

c)

On the EPM tab, choose Refresh.


2011


161


4.

BPC440

Enter the values as shown below and save the data to trigger the balancing calculations. Account ID

Account Description

F_CB

30110000

Revenue

125

12110300

Buildings

125

50

21121000

Accounts Payable

125

50

a)

F_OB

Enter the value as shown above and choose Save Data → Save Worksheet Data. The EPM - Submit Data dialog box is displayed.

b)

To send the data, choose Yes. The Save Results dialog box is displayed.

c) 5.

Choose OK.

Confirm your results.

Figure 113: Balancing Logic Result

Note: The system may generate a zero for 21121000 and F_ERR, for example. a) 6.

Confirm your results as shown above.

Save the template. a)

Choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder → Company(Public) → Reports.

b)

In the File Name field, enter: BPC440 Logic Test.

c)

Choose Save.


162


2011

BPC440


7.

8.

2011

Open the BPC440 Control Test input schedule and save it to the Company folder. You will use this template in a later exercise. a)

On the upper left, chooseOffice and then Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Control Test → Open.

b)


c)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 Control Test.

d)

Choose Save.

Deactivate the balancing logic by commenting out the include statement. a)

Go to the Web client and choose Rules → Logic Scripts → Scripts for: LEGAL → Default.LGF.

b)

Enter “//” in front of the code to comment it out: BALANCING.LGF

c)

Choose Save → Close → Return to Logic Scripts.


//*INCLUDE

163


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain how to use the three types of logic • Specify how logic is used to run consolidation tasks • Identify examples of how to use balancing logic

164


2011

BPC440

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe Environments • Create Dimensions • Add Properties • Create Hierarchies • Create models for legal consolidation • Explain the Model Types • Describe how Models reference each other • Explain how to use the three types of logic • Specify how logic is used to run consolidation tasks • Identify examples of how to use balancing logic

2011


165

Unit Summary

166

BPC440


2011

Unit 3 Preparing for Elimination

159

Data loads are always an interesting topic. Be prepared to comment on what students should think about as they prepare their data flow.

Unit Overview In this unit we will start off with the methods to bring data into SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation such as via flat file and InfoCube to InfoCube loads. Then, you will learn how to set up journal templates, control journal activities, create journal postings, and run reports. Next you will use the balance carry forward and reclassification business rules. Then, we will discuss the reasons to do currency translation, and then you will configure and execute the business rules on live data.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • •

2011

Import transaction data from flat files Import transaction data from BW InfoProviders Explain the Merge, Replace and Clear, and Append options Discuss data requirements for consolidation Discuss the business scenario Describe the components Configure the business rules Run balance carryforward Discuss when to use reclassification Describe the components Configure the business rule


167

Unit 3: Preparing for Elimination

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

BPC440

Run reclassification Verify the results Explain how to use the Consolidation Monitor Determine when to use Full vs. Incremental Processing Describe the Controls Monitor Discuss the Journals Workspace Describe the Ownership Manager Explain how to use journals in a controlled scenario Execute journal reports Build a journal template Describe the journal settings Create journals in one or several periods at once Discuss the high level concepts of currency translation Configure the business rules Review the results and explain the calculations

Unit Contents Lesson: Importing Flat File and InfoCube Data .............................169 Procedure: Importing Flat File Data......................................177 Exercise 6: Import Flat File Data .........................................183 Exercise 7: Import Data from a BW InfoCube ..........................195 Lesson: Configuring Balance Carryforward .................................208 Procedure: Configure Balance Carryforward ...........................215 Exercise 8: Configure Balance Carryforward Business Rules........217 Lesson: Reclassifying Data....................................................226 Procedure: Add a Package Prompt ......................................229 Procedure: Configure Reclassification ..................................233 Exercise 9: Configure Reclassification Business Rules ...............235 Lesson: Using Consolidation Central ........................................245 Procedure: How to Set Work Status In the Consolidation Monitor...250 Lesson: Setting up Journals ...................................................256 Procedure: How to Look up Journal Detail Tables .....................272 Procedure: How to upload journals ......................................273 Exercise 10: Configure and Use Journal Templates ...................275 Lesson: Translating Local Currency..........................................298 Procedure: How to Translate Multiple Group Currencies .............310 Exercise 11: Configure Currency Translation ........................... 311

168


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 161

Lesson: Importing Flat File and InfoCube Data

Importing Flat File and InfoCube Data Lesson Duration: 65 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson learn how to import flat file and InfoProvider data.


Import transaction data from flat files Import transaction data from BW InfoProviders Explain the Merge, Replace and Clear, and Append options Discuss data requirements for consolidation

We won’t focus so much on master data imports since that is covered in the BPC420 class.

Business Example As you put your implementation plan together, one of the most important parts of the project is to decide how and where the data will be loaded into the Consolidation Model. You need to know how the flat file process works as well as how to do InfoCube to InfoCube imports for example since some of your data may come from ECC via InfoCubes.

Data Requirements for Consolidation In this section, we will cover the data requirements for consolidation. Regardless of where your raw data will come from, the following list needs to be considered when evaluating source data. • • • • • • •

2011

Does trading partner for intercompany transactions exist? Are there values for every dimension in every record? How many currencies? How many legal entities? What tables does the data reside in? How many fiscal calendars are there? How many charts of accounts are there?


169


• •

BPC440

Is your source an InfoProvider in BW? Do you need to map multiple key figures? Is the source data periodic or year to date?

The Data Flow In this section, you will learn about the data flow. After the flat file is created in the source system, it must be uploaded on to the server. Conversion of external to internal data may not be necessary. Transformation files are always required however. They can be used to perform many other data transformations. The Data Manager package is used to execute the import.

Figure 114: Flat File BPC Transaction Data Import Architecture

Flat File Import Process In this section, we will cover flat file imports. Let’s take a look at a flat file import via a business user first, since it is so frequently used and will familiarize you used to the mechanics of data imports. To import a file, the file must reside on the server. The Upload function allows you to move files from your local machine or directory to the Data Files folder on the server.

170


2011

BPC440


After a file is uploaded, it can be previewed:

Figure 115: Flat File Preview

There are two Excel files you can use to carry out data transformations. Transformation and Conversion Files Transformation File

This file allows you to set up the rules for reading data from an external source and put it in the proper form for your system database. Transformation files are Microsoft Excel files that contain one worksheet named Instructions. The Instructions worksheet has the following sections: Options, Mapping, and Conversion. Options - specify flat file delimiters, header rows, skip if, validation of members, switch signs based on the acctype property, tolerance for error records, rounding, filter InfoProvider imports, call start and end routine, Business Add-Ins. Mapping - parsing, concatenation, pad, link characteristics to dimensions, link columns in a flat file to dimensions, convert multiple key figures to the single BPC key figure. Conversion - The *CONVERSION section of the transformation file defines which conversion sheet to use with which dimensions. Use the following syntax to associate a dimension with a conversion sheet: Dimension Name = [COMPANY]WorkbookName[!SheetName]. Items in brackets are optional.

Conversion File

This file allows you to map member names from external to internal dimension structures. You can set up multiple sheets in a conversion file so that many transformations can access the same conversion workbook. You can have one conversion file per dimension

Here’s an example of a conversion file.

2011


171


BPC440

Figure 116: Conversion File Example for Time and Entity

You create one conversion file or sheet per dimension in a transformation. Each conversion file can contain one or more sheets for different dimensions as you can see below.

Figure 117: Conversion File Example for Entity Roll-up

In the example above, note that we are performing a roll-up of six different IDs into two.

172


2011

BPC440


Conversion files are assigned to the appropriate dimension in the transformation file.

Figure 118: Transformation File - Conversion Section

There is also an Options section in Transformation files. OPTIONS: FORMAT: There is no default so this option must be defined. Delimited means that there is a special character between each column of data, defined by the Delimiter option (below). Fixed means that the data is in a fixed field format. HEADER: If YES, then your input file contains one header row that defines the fields. DELIMITER can be COMMA | SPACE | TAB. The default is a comma. If the FORMAT option is set to DELIMITED, this option defines the single character that is the delimiter between columns. Use the keywords SPACE or TAB if space or tab-delimited. SKIP: Number of lines to skip at the top of a data file. If your data file has a header, set this value so that those lines are skipped during transformation. SKIPIF = NULL will skip a record if it is null. VALIDATERECORDS: If YES, validate the mapping and that members exist, and map data in the proper order. CREDITPOSITIVE: If NO, all amounts referring to an ACCOUNT type (LEQ, INC) will have their signs reversed. MAXREJECTCOUNT: The number of bad records before the entire load fails.

2011


173


BPC440

SELECTION: Can only be used for InfoProvider imports to filter the data from the source. For example: SELECTION = ZCOMP,1010 will only load company 1010 from the source. ZCOMP is the technical name of the characteristic IOnfoObject. If your source data does not have signs on the data, you can use the CREDITPOSITIVE option to switch the sign during the import for LEQ and INC accounts. Just set CREDITPOSITIVE = NO.

Figure 119: Transformation File Options

There are many ways to transform data during import, including parsing.

174


2011

BPC440


Figure 120: Transformation File - Parsing

If a flat file does not have a header record, the mapping section can be used to identify which columns go with which dimensions.

Figure 121: Transformation File Mapping

2011


175


BPC440

Flat file and InfoProvider imports can both be simulated. Note: Use the Output File option to see the transformed data.

Figure 122: Flat File Simulation

176


2011

BPC440


Importing Flat File Data 169

1.

Upload the file on to the server and preview the data.

2.

Create the conversion file if there is a need for external to internal mapping. Save the file via the Validate and Process option.

3.

Create the transformation file and add the conversion file if there is one. To simulate and save the file, use the Validate and Process option.

4.

Execute the Data Manager package.

5.

Check the log for errors.

Update Options When importing data multiple times, you need to use the appropriate merge vs. replace and clear data mode.

Figure 123: Merge / Replace / Append

The merge option does not delete anything from the existing data set and new records are merged into the existing records.

2011


177


BPC440

Figure 124: Example of Merge

In the replace and clear scenario, the system checks to see if records have been loaded previously for up to four: dimensions: Data Source, Time, Category, and Entity.

Figure 125: Example of Replace and Clear

178


2011

BPC440


Figure 126: Example of Append

There are three packages to import flat file transaction data. 1.

Import Transaction Data Aggregate Overwrite Mode This package can be run in either Merge or Replace and Clear Mode. In both Merge and Replace and Clear mode existing values are completely offset in the database and the values in the import file are written as they are. When comparing values in the database to source files, this package should be used rather than #2. The net effect however is the same as in #2 below.

2.

Import Transaction Data Last Overwrite Mode This package can be run in either Merge or Replace and Clear Mode. In Merge mode, the difference between the existing and new values are written to the database. In Replace and Clear mode existing values are completely offset in the database and the values in the import file are written as they are. The net effect is the same as in #1 above.

3.

Append This package can only be run in Append mode.

2011


179


BPC440

Figure 127: Data Manager Packages

BW InfoProviders In this section, we will cover InfoProvider imports. The data flow for the InfoProvider import is shown below.

Figure 128: InfoProvider Data Import Scenario

180


2011

BPC440


The mapping section is used to assign the source characteristics to the target dimensions. In the example below, C_CATEGORY is the dimension and ZVER is the BW Characteristic. If the source has multiple key figures, the *MVAL key word can be used to map key figures to accounts in the Model.

Figure 129: Transformation File Mapping for InfoProviders

2011


181


182


BPC440

2011

BPC440

175


Exercise 6: Import Flat File Data Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Perform a flat file data import via the Data Manager. • Use conversion and transformation files. • Use the Validate and Process Transformation File option to simulate the import.

Business Example You have data in a legacy system and each month the IT group sends you a file with the monthly year-to-date results. There are a couple of intentional problems with the file that you will need to address with the conversion and transformation files, but other than that, the data is fine. The data in the file includes income statement as well as balance sheet data.

Task 1: Upload and preview the flat file. 1.

Open the Excel interface of the EPM add-in.

2.

Upload and preview the Legal Data file.

Task 2: Create the conversion and transformation files. 1.

Deactivate member recognition.

2.

Create a conversion file that will insert C in front of each company ID.

3.

Create a transformation file.

4.

Configure the options for no header row and to derive the sign during the import.

5.

Create mappings so the system knows which dimensions are in which columns as shown below.


2011


183


BPC440

Figure 130: Mapping

6.

Add a reference to the Conversion file.

7.

Validate and process the transformation file. Use the file name LEGALDATATRANS.

8.

Import the data.

Task 3: Run an EPM report on your new data. 1.

Set your EPM context data selections as shown below. Dimension


Company

H1 - Investments

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct


C_Category

Actual - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow

F_CB - Closing Balance

Intco

TOTAL -Total


184


2011

BPC440

2011


Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

2.

Open the provided BPC440 Account Totals report template in your BPC440_## folder.

3.

Save the report.


185


BPC440

Solution 6: Import Flat File Data Task 1: Upload and preview the flat file. 1.

Open the Excel interface of the EPM add-in. a)

OIn the Web client Start Page, select EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens.

b)

Choose the Legal - BPC440_## connection.

c)

Choose OK. The EPM pane appears on the right.


186


2011

BPC440


2.

Upload and preview the Legal Data file. a)

Choose theData Manager tab.

b)

Choose Upload Data → Browse → BPC440 → BPC440_##.

c)

Choose Legal Data → Open.

d)

In the Data Manager - Upload dialog box, choose Upload → Save → OK. The file is now on the server.

e)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Data Preview.

f)

In the Open dialog, select the Legal Data file and choose Open.

g)

Under File type or table, choose Delimited.

h)

Under Select a delimiter, choose COMMA.

Figure 131: Flat File Preview

With the data now displayed, do you see what the issues are with the data? • • • i)

Companies are all missing the letter C in the 1st position. There is no header row. All of the values are positive.

Choose Cancel.

Task 2: Create the conversion and transformation files. 1.

Deactivate member recognition. a)

On the EPM tag, choose Options → Sheet Options.

b)

Deselect Activate Member Recognition and choose OK.

c)

Select the Data Manager tab. Continued on next page

2011


187


2.

BPC440

Create a conversion file that will insert C in front of each company ID. a)

Choose Conversion Files → New Conversion File.

b)

In row 2, enter the following data: External

Internal

*

C*

c)

Save and validate the file: Choose Conversion Files →Validate & Process Conversion File.

d)

Under File Name, enter LEGENT. Then choose Save → OK.

Figure 132: Saved Conversion File

3.

Create a transformation file. a)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Transformation File → New Transformation File.


188


2011

BPC440


4.

Configure the options for no header row and to derive the sign during the import. a)

Change the HEADER option to NO.

b)

Change the CREDITPOSITIVE option to NO.

Figure 133: Flat File Options

5.

Create mappings so the system knows which dimensions are in which columns as shown below.


2011


189


BPC440

Figure 134: Mapping

a)

Enter the data as shown above. The C_ACCT dimension, for example, will receive its data from column one.

6.

Add a reference to the Conversion file. a)

In row 26, enter COMPANY = LEGENT.XLS. The conversion file is now linked to the transformation file.


190


2011

BPC440


7.

Validate and process the transformation file. Use the file name LEGALDATATRANS. a)

To open the simulation window, choose Transformation File → Validate and Process Transformation File.

b)

Use the existing data type of Transaction Data from Flat File.

c)

Below the Data field, select your Legal Data file.

d)

Choose Save.

e)

Enter LEGALDATATRANS and choose Save. Hint: You can select the output file to see your data conversion simulation. Hint: If an error occurs, you can keep the Validation Status window open while you do your troubleshooting. Then, you can Revalidate if necessary.

Figure 135: Flat File Simulation

f)

Choose Cancel.


2011


191


8.

BPC440

Import the data. a)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Run package.

b)

Under Package Name, choose Import transaction data last overwrite mode→ Run.

c)

On the file selection screen, c choose Browse.

d)

Next to File Name select All Files.

e)

Choose Legal Data → Open → Next. Caution: Do not use the default transformation file in the next step.

f)

Choose Browse → LEGALDATATRANS → Open → Next. The transformation file is selected.

g)

Verify that the method for update is set to Merge data values ... and choose Next.

h)

Do not run default logic. Choose No → Next.

i)

Do not check work status settings. Choose No, do not check for work status settings → Next → Finish → Ok.

j)

Choose View Status to check your log.

k)

Select the box next to Refresh Status Every 5 Seconds.

l)

Under Status, when you see Succeed, double-click the entry. Hopefully, all of your records were accepted. Otherwise, read the log for error messages. Close the popups.

Task 3: Run an EPM report on your new data. 1.

Set your EPM context data selections as shown below. Dimension


Company

H1 - Investments

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct


C_Category

Actual - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow

F_CB - Closing Balance Continued on next page

192


2011

BPC440


Intco

TOTAL -Total

Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a) 2.

Set your context selections as shown above.

Open the provided BPC440 Account Totals report template in your BPC440_## folder. a)

On the upper left, choose Office → Open.

b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Account Totals→ Open.

c)

In EPM, choose Refresh.

Figure 136: Flat File Result - Account Totals

3.

2011

Save the report. a)

Choose Save → Save to Server Root Folder.

b)

Choose Company(Public) → Reports.

c)

Enter BPC440 Account Totals and choose Save.


193


194


BPC440

2011

BPC440

187


Exercise 7: Import Data from a BW InfoCube Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Set up an import from a normal BW InfoCube. • Use a variety of transformation options

Business Example When it comes to loading transaction data, flexibility is the key. Since SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation sits on top of BW, customers are interested in loading SAP Business Planning and Consolidation InfoCubes from other InfoCubes in BW. There can be several reasons for this. For example, you may already have EC-PCA (Profit Center Accounting) or General Ledger Accounting (new) data sitting in BW and want to feed it into the Legal model. There will also be situations where customers will need to perform data layering in BW and may have to homogenize the data before it is ready for consolidation.

Task 1: Import data from a provided BW InfoCube that has been loaded from ECC. Note: ECC Stands for ERP Central Component, the SAP OLTP transactional system otherwise known as SAP R/3. 1.

Open the Excel interface of the EPM add-in for IC Matching. Hint: If you are already in Excel, you can log off and then back on again to create the new connection.

2011

2.

Deactivate Member Recognition.

3.

Open the Data Manager.

4.

Validate and process the provided ICCONV conversion file.

5.

Confirm the external to internal conversion listed below.

6.

Open the ICTRANS transformation sheet to map the BW characteristics to the BPC dimensions and integrate the conversion files into the process. Continued on next page


195


BPC440

7.

Validate and process the transformation file. Save it as ICTRANS.

8.

Import the data from the ECCDATA InfoCube.

Task 2: Run a report in the EPM Excel add-in to view your data. 1.

196

Set your EPM context data selections as shown below: Dimension

Member

COMPANY

CG2 - Europe

CONSGROUP

G_NONE - G None

C_CATEGORY

ACTUAL - Actual

FLOW


ICACCOUNT

CTLICEN00 - IC Long Term Loan

ICDATASRC


INTCO

ALL_INTERCO - All Intercompany

RPTCURRENCY

LC - Local Currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

2.

Run the provided BPC440 IC Matching Load Report.

3.

Save the report as BPC440 IC Matching Load Report.


2011

BPC440


Solution 7: Import Data from a BW InfoCube Task 1: Import data from a provided BW InfoCube that has been loaded from ECC. Note: ECC Stands for ERP Central Component, the SAP OLTP transactional system otherwise known as SAP R/3. 1.

Open the Excel interface of the EPM add-in for IC Matching. Hint: If you are already in Excel, you can log off and then back on again to create the new connection. a)

On the Web client Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager opens.

b)

Choose OK. The EPM pane appears on the right.

2.

3.

Deactivate Member Recognition. a)

On the EPM tab, choose Options → User Options → Other → and deselect Activate Member Recognition by Default.

b)

Choose OK.

c)

Choose Options → Sheet Options and deselect Activate Member Recognition.

d)

Choose OK.

Open the Data Manager. a)

Choose the Data Manager tab.


2011


197


4.

BPC440

Validate and process the provided ICCONV conversion file. a)

Choose Office → Open.

b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → ICCONV → Open. Caution: Do not save the file to the examples folder, just let the system save the file to the default folder. Note: You do not have to change anything in the file.

c)

Choose Conversion Files →Validate & Process Conversion File.

d)

In the File Name, enter ICCONV, then choose Save → OK.

Figure 137: ICM Conversion File

This will perform a roll up of 6 IDs into two company IDs. 5.

Confirm the external to internal conversion listed below. a)

Select the sheet for each dimension and verify the following: C_Category External

Internal

0

ACTUAL


198


2011

BPC440


Consgroup External

Internal

None

G_NONE

Intco External

Internal

1000

I_C1000

2000

I_C2000

Flow External

Internal

00999

F_CB

RptCurrency External

Internal

10

LC

TIME External

Internal

2011012

2011.12

ICACCOUNT External

Internal

12710000

AS27480000

21171000

LI16870000

Note: ICDatasrc is not included above since no conversion is required. 6.

Open the ICTRANS transformation sheet to map the BW characteristics to the BPC dimensions and integrate the conversion files into the process. a)

Choose Office → Open.

b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → ICTRANS → Open. Note: You do not need to change anything. Continued on next page

2011


199


BPC440

Figure 138: ICM Options

The transformation file is opened and you can check out the settings for *OPTIONS Note the CreditPositive=NO setting that causes the system to switch the signs for accounts with account type = Inc and Leq. c)

Under *MAPPING, verify the assignment of the BW InfoObjects to the BPC dimensions as shown below:


200


2011

BPC440


Figure 139: ICM Mapping

Note: The dimensions and amount field receiving the data are on the left. The BW characteristics and key figure are on the right. d)

Under *CONVERSION, verify the assignment of the conversions to the dimensions as shown below:


2011


201


BPC440

Figure 140: ICM Conversion

Note: Each dimension is a separate sheet in the conversion file in this example.


202


2011

BPC440


7.

Validate and process the transformation file. Save it as ICTRANS. a)

Open the simulation window: Transformation File → Validate and Process Transformation File.

b)

Under Data Type, select Transaction Data from NetWeaver BW InfoProvider.

c)

In the InfoProvider field, enter ECCDATA.

d)

Choose Save.

e)

In the File Name, enter ICTRANS and choose Save. Note: If the system asks if you want it to propose conversion file changes, answer “NO”. If there is an issue, try looking at the Output file to find the problem. Hint: If an error does occur, you can keep the Validate and Process Transformation window open while you do your troubleshooting. Then, you can Revalidate.

f)

Choose Output File.

Figure 141: ICM Output File

g)

Choose Cancel.


2011


203


8.

BPC440

Import the data from the ECCDATA InfoCube. a)

Choose Run package.

b)

Start the import package and select your data file. Choose Load Transaction Data from BW InfoProvider. Caution: Do not use the default transformation file.

c)

Choose Run and enter ECCDATA, then choose Next.

d)

Choose Browse → ICTRANS → Open → Next.

e)

Select the data transfer mode: Aggregate Overwrite → Next

f)

Confirm the method for update: Merge Data Values→ Next

g)

Do not run default logic for stored values after importing: Choose No → Next.

h)

Do not check work status settings: Choose No, do not check for work status settings → Next → Finish → Ok.

i)

Check your log: Choose View Status.

j)

Choose Refresh Status Every.

k)

When Succeed appears under Status, double-click the entry.

Figure 142: ICM Detail Log

l)

Close the popups.


204


2011

BPC440


Task 2: Run a report in the EPM Excel add-in to view your data. 1.

Set your EPM context data selections as shown below: Dimension

Member

COMPANY

CG2 - Europe

CONSGROUP

G_NONE - G None

C_CATEGORY

ACTUAL - Actual

FLOW


ICACCOUNT

CTLICEN00 - IC Long Term Loan

ICDATASRC


INTCO

ALL_INTERCO - All Intercompany

RPTCURRENCY

LC - Local Currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a) 2.

Left click in the fields for each dimension to select the members shown above.

Run the provided BPC440 IC Matching Load Report. a)


b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 IC Matching Load Report → Open.

c)


Figure 143: IC Matching Load Report


2011


205


3.

206

BPC440

Save the report as BPC440 IC Matching Load Report. a)


b)


c)

Enter BPC440 IC Matching Load Report and choose Save.


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Import transaction data from flat files • Import transaction data from BW InfoProviders • Explain the Merge, Replace and Clear, and Append options • Discuss data requirements for consolidation

2011


207


Lesson: 200

BPC440

Configuring Balance Carryforward Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to set up balance carryforward.


Discuss the business scenario Describe the components Configure the business rules Run balance carryforward

How customers use bcf depends in part on whether they are importing closing balances each month.

Business Example You are preparing for the year end activities and so you are interested in the business rule for balance carryforward.

The Business Scenario In this section you will learn about business scenarios for balance carryforward. The closing balance of one year will normally equal the opening balance of the following year. The first task for a new fiscal year is therefore to carryforward the balance from the previous year. You can however run this task as often as you need to since it is so flexible. The Purpose of Balance Carryforward in General: • • •

208

Create opening balances in the new year Assign current year retained earnings to prior year retained earnings Roll up prior year values into new year opening balances if necessary


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Configuring Balance Carryforward

Figure 144: Copy Year End Balances

Balance carryforward can also be used to perform roll ups of prior year values.

Figure 145: Copy Opening - Roll Up

2011


209


BPC440

The Components In the graphic below, the following steps occur: 1. 2.

The business user runs the Balance Carryforward package. They provide the member values for category, time, entity, and currency. The data is passed to the related process chain. Hint: Process Chains are used in BW for background processing.

3. 4.

The Process Chain triggers the logic call. The Business Add-In is triggered. The associated dimensions and source/target accounts are read from the business rule table. Data is carried forward into the month and year specified.

Figure 146: The Architecture for Balance Carryforward

The opening balance Data Manager package is delivered but needs to be added to the model. Note: It can be run for one month at a time.

210


2011

BPC440


Figure 147: Data Manager Opening Balances Package

The package includes prompts for the following dimensions: • • • •

Category Time Entity Currency

The logic file is used to call the delivered Business Add-In and to provide prompts to the Data Manager package.

Figure 148: Balance Carryforward Logic

2011


211


BPC440

Supporting Properties in the Flow Dimension: •

FLOW_TYPE - One member is given the value of OPENING and another will have the property value of CLOSING

Supporting Properties in the Data Source Dimension: • •

COPYOPENING - use values of Y or N to include or exclude data source members in the Copy Opening Process OPENING_DATASRC - specific destination data source the opening balance should be written to. If blank, they are written to the same data source Note: This procedure only copies the opening balances as found in the DATASRC dimension members flagged as I (Input) and M (Manual) in the DATASRC_TYPE property but not the A (Automatic) members. This means that the procedure will only carry forward the Input balances and Manual adjustments. The consolidation process will carry forward the Automatic values by default.

Supporting Properties in the Category Dimension: •

•

•

CATEGORY_FOR_OPE - blank or category from which to read the opening balances from (for example to use Estimates as opening for a Budget Category). If blank, the balances are taken from the same category OPENING_YEAR - blank or year from which to read the opening balances from (absolute value like 2006 or an offset value like -2 or +3). If blank, the balances are taken over from the last year OPENING_PERIOD - blank or specific period from which to read the opening balances from (an absolute value like MAR, or relative value like -1, +4). If blank, the balances are taken from the last period of the year

The Business Rule Below you can see an example of a carry forward business rule. Note: If the destination field is blank, the values are inherited from the source.

212


2011

BPC440


Figure 149: Copy Opening - Business Rule

Carry Forward Business Rule Fields Field

Definition

Source Account

The source account base level, parent, or dimlist property value

Source Flow

The source flow base level, parent, or dimlist property value

Source Data Source

The source data source base level, parent, or dimlist property value

Destination Account

The destination account base level or parent. If blank, inherit from source.

Destination Flow

The destination flow base level or parent. If blank, inherit from source.

Destination Data Source

The destination data source base level or parent. If blank, inherit from source.

Reverse Sign

Reverse the sign of the source value

Data Source Type

Select data source type to include: A - All, I - Input, M Manual

Same Period

If selected, the source time period is the same as the destination. Otherwise, the source data is the last period of the prior year

Apply to YTD

In a periodic model, select to calculate the YTD value to copy

Note: Dimlist is a dimension property used as a grouping mechanism for business rule member selections.

The Results Below you can see the data after running the business rule for January 2012. It is not required to use a unique data source for the new year although that was done in this example. (AJ_BCF)

2011


213


BPC440

Figure 150: Balance Carryforward Result

214


2011

BPC440


Configure Balance Carryforward 207

2011

1.

In Administration goto Rules → Logic Scripts and copy the script from the EnvironmentShell and Consolidation Model.

2.

Copy the delivered code into a new logic file called COPY_OPENING with your own dimension names.

3.

In Rules, turn on the Carry-Forward business rule for your consolidation model.

4.

Configure the Carry-Forward business rule.

5.

In Dimensions and Models → Dimensions populate the relevant dimension properties for flow, category, and data source

6.

In the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in, create the copy opening Data Manager package in your model. Go to the Data Manager → Organize → Organize Package List

7.

In the Data Manager, select Run Package and execute balance carryforward for the target dimension members and check the log to see your record count

8.

Review the results in an EPM add-in report


215


216


BPC440

2011

BPC440

209


Exercise 8: Configure Balance Carryforward Business Rules Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure the business rules to do balance carryforward. • Use the delivered script logic, program, and Data Manager package • Execute and review the data generated by the function.

Business Example To prepare for a new year in the Planning and Consolidation Application, the opening balances are normally rolled over from the prior year.

Task 1: Configure the balance carryforward business rule. 1.

Turn on the Account - Based Calculations Rule Type for your Legal Model.

2.

Open the Carry-Forward Rule Type.

3.

Configure the rule. Note: In this example, current year retained earnings is included in the parent member id = 1.

Figure 151: Balance Carryforward Business Rule

Task 2: Review the Copy Opening Logic Script for the Legal Model. 1.

Open up the Logic Scripts for Legal Continued on next page

2011


217


2.

BPC440

Review the code in the copy opening LGF

Task 3: Create the Balance Carryforward Data Manager Package 1.

Connect to the EPM Excel Add-in.

2.

Add the Data Manager package for the OPENING_BALANCES process chain.

Task 4: Execute the Balance Carryforward package 1.

Open the Balance Carryforward package.

2.

Execute the package.

Task 5: Analyze the results in a report. 1.

218

Set your EPM Context as shown below. Dimension


Company

H1 - Investments

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct

Any value is okay

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc

Any value is okay

Flow

Any value is okay

Intco

I_NONE - No InterCompany

Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

Any value is okay

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

2.

Verify your results with the BPC440 BCF report.

3.

Save the report.


2011

BPC440


Solution 8: Configure Balance Carryforward Business Rules Task 1: Configure the balance carryforward business rule. 1.

Turn on the Account - Based Calculations Rule Type for your Legal Model. a)

From the Home Tab on the Start Page, choose Planning and Consolidation Administration

b)

Click Rules → Business Rules

c)

Highlight the row for Legal → Add / Remove Rule Types

Figure 152: Add Rule Type

d)

Select Carry-Forward and choose OK Now the Carry-Forward rule can be used.

2.

Open the Carry-Forward Rule Type. a)

3.

Choose Carry-Forward

Configure the rule. Note: In this example, current year retained earnings is included in the parent member id = 1.


2011


219


BPC440

Figure 153: Balance Carryforward Business Rule

a)

Configure the business rule as you see above. • • •

b)

In the first row, the entire balance sheet (1) closing balance is carried forward. In the second row, the current year retaining earnings (25712000) carried forward in row one is negated. In the third row, the current year retained earnings is written to prior year retained earnings (25714000).

Choose Save → Close

Task 2: Review the Copy Opening Logic Script for the Legal Model. 1.

Open up the Logic Scripts for Legal a)

2.

Choose Rules → Logic Scripts → Scripts for: Legal

Review the code in the copy opening LGF a)

Under Scripts for: Legal choose COPY_OPENING.LGF Your code should appear as follows: //For running balance carry forward rule (copy opening) *RUN_PROGRAM COPYOPENING CATEGORY = %C_CATEGORY_SET% CURRENCY = %RPTCURRENCY_SET% TID_RA = %TIME_SET% ENTITY = %ENTITY_SET% *ENDRUN_PROGRAM

b)

Choose Close → Return to Logic Scripts


220


2011

BPC440


Task 3: Create the Balance Carryforward Data Manager Package 1.

Connect to the EPM Excel Add-in. a)

On the Web client Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel The EPM - Connection Manager opens after a few seconds.

b) 2.

Choose Legal - BPC440_## → OK

Add the Data Manager package for the OPENING_BALANCES process chain. a)

Choose the Data Manager tab

b)

Choose Organize → Organize Package List

c)

Under legal, choose the Financial Process Package Group and right click in the area shown below:

Figure 154: Create Package

d)

Choose Add Package

e)

Choose Select

f)

Under Legal, choose Business Planning and Consolidation: Script Logic → BPC: Opening Balance → OK

g)

In the Package name and Description enter BCF

h)

Under task types select Admin Package and User Package


2011


221


BPC440

Figure 155: Add Package

i)

Add → Close You have added the Balance CarryfForward package to your legal model

Task 4: Execute the Balance Carryforward package 1.

Open the Balance Carryforward package. a)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Run Package The Run Package dialog opens.


222


2011

BPC440


2.

Execute the package. a)

Under Legal chooseFinancial Process → BCF → Run

b)

Use the data selections as shown below: Dimension

Member

Company

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

LC

Time

2012.01

You have selected to carry forward data into 2012.01 (from 2011.12). c)

Choose Next → Finish → OK.

d)

Choose View Status.

e)

Double-click the log and choose the Formula Log to see the details.

Figure 156: Detail Log

f)

Close the popups.

Task 5: Analyze the results in a report. 1.



Company

H1 - Investments

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None Continued on next page

2011


223


C_Acct

Any value is okay

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc

Any value is okay

Flow

Any value is okay

Intco

I_NONE - No InterCompany

Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

Any value is okay

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a) 2.

BPC440

Left click in the dimension member fields to adopt the above selections.

Verify your results with the BPC440 BCF report. a)

On the upper left, choose Office → Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 BCF→ Open.

b)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 157: Balance Carryforward Result

3.

224

Save the report. a)


b)


c)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 BCF .

d)

Choose Save.


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss the business scenario • Describe the components • Configure the business rules • Run balance carryforward

2011


225


Lesson: 218

BPC440

Reclassifying Data Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to set up reclassification.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • •

Discuss when to use reclassification Describe the components Configure the business rule Run reclassification Verify the results

Account transformation is commonly referred to as reclassifications and are used quite a bit. Some customers use account transformations to do balance carry forward by the way.

Business Example You are looking for a way to calculate cash flow and perform other realignments of data and so you are interested in learning about account transformation also referred to as reclassification.

The Business Scenario Examples of when to use reclassification in general • • •

226

Perform simple cash flow calculations Calculate annual net income and post to retained earnings Book subsidiary finished goods into corporate work in process inventory


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Reclassifying Data

The Components To run reclassification, you need the following components: • • • •

The CALC_ACCOUNT logic file The Account - based Calculations business rule The BPC - Calculate Account process chain A Data Manager package that uses the BPC - Calculate Account process chain

The script logic file is just like the one for balance carry forward except it includes row 7 CALC = CF. CF is the identifier for each Account-based Calculation business rule. This unique feature would allow the use of a case statement to execute different Account-based Calculation business rules depending on whether it is an interim month or quarter ending month for example

Figure 158: Calc_Account Logic

In the Data Manager a package will be needed to run the delivered BPC: Calculate Account process chain. Note: The task type controls who can run the package. Users with Admin rights or those without.

2011


227


BPC440

The package will include prompts for the following dimensions: • • • •

Category Time Entity Currency Note: Other dimension member prompts can be added to the package if needed.

When adding the package to the model, you can make it available to both admin and non-admin users as shown below.


228


2011

BPC440


Add a Package Prompt 221

1.

In the Data Manager, choose Organize → Organize Package List

2.

Modify the package

3.

Select Modify Script → Advanced

4.

Add your new dimension prompt to the PROMPT row

The Business Rule Account transformation reads and aggregates the values posted to specific combinations of accounts, flow types, and data sources to post the aggregated amount under an alternate destination account, flow and data source combination. The account transformation business rule inverts the sign when posting calculated amounts if appropriate. This rule can also use reference data in other periods and years to determine amounts to post. And it supports year-to-date calculations in period-based Models.

Figure 160: Reclassification Business Rule

Account Based Calculation Business Rule Fields

2011

Field

Definition

ID

Identifier used in the logic file to call the business rule

Source Account

The source account base level, parent, or dimlist property value

Category

The source category base level, parent, or dimlist property value

Source Flow

The source flow base level, parent, or dimlist property value

Source Data Source

The source data source base level, parent, or dimlist property value


229


BPC440

Destination Account

The destination account base level or parent. If blank, inherit from source.

Destination Category

The destination category base level, parent, or property value

Destination Flow

The destination flow base level or parent. If blank, inherit from source.


The destination data source base level or parent. If blank, inherit from source.

Reverse Sign

Reverse the sign of the source value

Data Source Type

Select data source type to include: A - All, I - Input, M Manual

Source Period

If not specified, the source time period is the same as the destination. This could also be used in planning scenarios.

Source Year

If not specified, the source year is the same as the destination. This could also be used in planning scenarios.

Apply to YTD

In a periodic model, select to calculate the YTD value to copy. This could also be used in planning scenarios.

Level

This controls the sequence of execution for each row.

Remark

Description of that row’s calculation

The Results Here’s an example of how to calculate and store annual net income and retained earnings. This would be very useful in cases where the source system does not contain those values such as ECC.

230


2011

BPC440


Figure 161: Reclassification of Annual Net Income Data and Business Rule

Figure 162: Results of Annual Net Income Reclassification

In the example below, a simple cash flow calculation has been performed.

2011


231


BPC440

Figure 163: Cash Flow Calculation Result

232


2011

BPC440


Configure Reclassification 225

2011

1.

In Administration goto Rules → Logic Scripts and copy the script from the EnvironmentShell and Consolidation Model.

2.

Paste the code into a new logic file called CALC_ACCOUNT with your own dimension names.

3.

In Rules, turn on the Account-based Calculations business rule for your consolidation model.

4.

Configure the Account-based Calculations business rule with the source and target member selections.

5.

In the Excel Interface for the EPM add-in, create the Reclassification package in your Model. Goto the Data Manager → Organize → Organize Package List

6.

Add the package with a name of your choice.

7.

In the Data Manager, select Run Package and execute Reclassification for the target dimension members and check the log to see your record count

8.

Review the results in an EPM add-in report


233


234


BPC440

2011

BPC440

227


Exercise 9: Configure Reclassification Business Rules Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the account transformation business rule to calculate cash flow. • Create a Data Manager package. • Execute the package. • Describe the components that are being used.

Business Example You need to generate some cash flow reports and are looking to use the account transformation business rules to calculate the values that you need. You are also interested in using these business rules for reclassification, such as moving subsidiary finished goods inventory back to corporate work in process, or reclassifying annual net income to retained earnings.

Task 1: Configure the Account-Based Calculations business rule. Note: There are several terms used to describe this business rule, including Reclassification and Calc Account. 1.

In the Administration Web client Rules area, activate the Account-Based Calculations rule type for your Legal model.

2.

Open the Account-Based Calculations rule type and create the ID. Note: The reclassification business rule can have one or more identifiers that are called by the logic. In this case, we are using the CF ID since we are calculating cash flow.

3.

Configure the business rule as shown below. Hint: You can right click a row to copy and paste it to speed up the data entry.


2011


235


BPC440


Task 2: Review the CALCACCOUNT logic script for the Legal model. 1.

Access the logic files for Legal.

2.

Review the code in CALCACCOUNT.LGF.

Task 3: Create the “Calculate CF” Data Manager package. 1.

Connect to the legal model in the EPM add-in.

2.

Add the Data Manager package for the BPC: Calculate Account process chain. Allow both admin and non-admin users access to it. Use the Financial Process Package Group.

Task 4: Execute the Calculate CF package 1.

Run the Calculate CF package for the following selections: Dimension

Member

Company

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

LC

Time

2011.12

Task 5: Review the results in a report. 1.

Set your EPM Context as shown below. Continued on next page

236


2011

BPC440

2011


Dimension


Company

H1 - Investments

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco

I_NONE - No Intercompany

Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

2.

Open the provided BPC440 Cash Flow Calculation report.

3.

Save the report.


237


BPC440

Solution 9: Configure Reclassification Business Rules Task 1: Configure the Account-Based Calculations business rule. Note: There are several terms used to describe this business rule, including Reclassification and Calc Account. 1.

2.

In the Administration Web client Rules area, activate the Account-Based Calculations rule type for your Legal model. a)

From the Home tab on the Start Page, choose Planning and Consolidation Administration.

b)

Choose Rules → Business Rules.

c)

Choose the row for Legal → Add / Remove Rule Types.

d)

Select Account-Based Calculations→ OK.

Open the Account-Based Calculations rule type and create the ID. Note: The reclassification business rule can have one or more identifiers that are called by the logic. In this case, we are using the CF ID since we are calculating cash flow.

3.

a)

Choose the Account-Based Calculations row, and then Open → New.

b)

Next to ID, enter CF.

c)

Next to Description, enter Calculate Cash Flow.

Configure the business rule as shown below. Hint: You can right click a row to copy and paste it to speed up the data entry.


238


2011

BPC440



a)

Configure the business rule as you see above. The first row will copy the annual net income into the CF001 cash flow account. The second and third row will copy the depreciation accounts into the CF002 cash flow account.

b)

Choose Save → Close → Return to Business Rules .

Task 2: Review the CALCACCOUNT logic script for the Legal model. 1.

Access the logic files for Legal. a)

2.

Under Rules, choose Logic Scripts → Scripts for: Legal.

Review the code in CALCACCOUNT.LGF. a)

Under Scripts for: Legal, choose CALCACCOUNT.LGF. Your code should appear as follows: //For running account calculation business rule *RUN_PROGRAM CALC_ACCOUNT CATEGORY = %C_CATEGORY_SET% CURRENCY = %RPTCURRENCY_SET% TID_RA = %TIME_SET% CALC = CF *ENDRUN_PROGRAM

b)

Return to Rules and choose Close → Return to Logic Scripts.


2011


239


BPC440

Task 3: Create the “Calculate CF” Data Manager package. 1.

2.

Connect to the legal model in the EPM add-in. a)

On the Web client Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel.

b)

Connect to the Legal - BPC440_## connection.

Add the Data Manager package for the BPC: Calculate Account process chain. Allow both admin and non-admin users access to it. Use the Financial Process Package Group. a)

Open the Data Manager ribbon and choose the Data Manager tab.

b)

Choose Organize → Organize Package List.

c)

Under legal, choose the Financial Process Package Group .

d)

Right click in the area shown below.


e)

Choose Add Package.

f)

Choose Select.

g)

Under Legal, choose Business Planning and Consolidation: Script Logic → BPC: Calculate Account → OK.

h)

In the Package Name and Description fields, enter Calculate CF.

i)

Allow access. Select both Admin Package and User Package task types.


240


2011

BPC440



j)

Choose Save→ Close.

Task 4: Execute the Calculate CF package 1.

Run the Calculate CF package for the following selections:


2011


241


BPC440

Dimension

Member

Company

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

LC

Time

2011.12

a)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Run Package. The Run Package dialog opens.

b)

Under Legal, choose Financial Process → Calculate CF → Run.

c)

Use the data selections as shown above.

d)


e)

Choose View Status.

f)



g)

Close the popups.




Company

H1 - Investments

Consgroup


242


2011

BPC440


C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco


Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a) 2.


Open the provided BPC440 Cash Flow Calculation report. a)

On the upper left, choose Office → Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Cash Flow Calculation→ Open.

b)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 169: Cash Flow Calculation Result

You will see the values in the account 39000000 that was copied to the CF001 cashflow account, as well as the depreciation that was copied to the account CF002. There is no value for the equipment depreciation 30527150 in the 2011 December actual. 3.

2011

Save the report. a)


b)


c)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 Cash Flow.

d)

Choose Save.


243


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss when to use reclassification • Describe the components • Configure the business rule • Run reclassification • Verify the results

244


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 237

Lesson: Using Consolidation Central

Using Consolidation Central Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn about the Consolidation Monitor, Controls Monitor, Journals Workspace, and Ownership Manager components from a user perspective.


Explain how to use the Consolidation Monitor Determine when to use Full vs. Incremental Processing Describe the Controls Monitor Discuss the Journals Workspace Describe the Ownership Manager

This will give students a feel for their labs on Wednesday / Thursday. It might be difficult, but try not to involve concepts that are covered later.

Business Example Now that your company or client has implemented SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation version for SAP NetWeaver, you need to learn how to work with the Consolidation Central workspace.

Consolidation Central The Consolidation Central module enables you to generate and manage consolidated data. This gives you an accurate view of the status of the collected and consolidated data within your organization, as well as a unified environment to perform consolidation tasks over the Web.

Consolidation Monitor The Consolidation Monitor is a workspace for monitoring the consolidation progress for a specific consolidation scope for a given category, period, group, or subgroup.

2011


245


BPC440

The Consolidation Monitor is a key component in executing incremental processing, since it communicates timestamps to the consolidation engine on which entities to execute a currency translation or consolidation. The Consolidation Monitor displays the Group/Entity hierarchy created in the Ownership Manager for Consolidation type models). Consolidation Monitor all-in-one Screen: • • • •

Controls status Work status Currency translation status Consolidation status

Below you can see the monitor before any tasks have been run. The scope context area displays the selected dimension members for time, category, and group.

Figure 170: Consolidation Monitor - Before Running Any Tasks

246


2011

BPC440


In the Consolidation Monitor you can do the following: • •

Display the control set status to see the results of the controls process Display the work status Note: To display the work status in the Consolidation Monitor, the driving dimensions must be at a minimum Category, Period and Entity. Work states can only be set by base level member.

•

Display the currency translation status When you select a base level entity and run the currency translation for this entity, you can select the reporting currency in which to run the translation. When you select a Group or Sub-Group, the currency translation is run on the currencies defined for the selected group.

•

Display the consolidation status The status can be either Done or To be executed.

•

Display the running processes Running processes are displayed with percent completion. You can only display processes for Groups to which you have Read access.

•

Reset the consolidation status Note: You should reset the consolidation status to To be executed in the following cases: – – –

Changes in the rate and ownership data Changes in master data Changes to the rusiness rules

Note: The programs for currency translation and consolidation are called directly. The logic files are not used when run from the Monitor. However, the Data Manager packages do use the script logic files. You can perform a full consolidation, which processes all entities in the ownership-based hierarchy, or you can perform an incremental consolidation, which processes only entities with changed transaction data. Incremental consolidation reduces the impact on system resources Incremental vs. Full Mode for Currency and Consolidation:

2011


247


BPC440

Incremental vs. Full Mode for Currency and Consolidation Execution Mode

Result

Full

All entities are processed

Incremental

Only entities with changed transaction data are processed

Note: Timestamps are generated for entity, time, and category when currency and consolidation are executed. When running in incremental mode, if the currency or consolidation timestamp is before an entity’s data update timestamp, the program is triggered. Full consolidation should be run in the following cases: 1. 2. 3.

Changes in the rate and ownership data Changes in master data Changes to the business rules

You perform incremental currency translation or consolidation, or both, in the following cases: 1.

2.

3.

248

When an update to an entity’s transaction data is more recent than the last currency translation performed for the group or sub-groups to which the entity belongs, then an incremental currency translation should be performed for the entity. When an update to an entity’s transaction data is more recent than the last consolidation performed for the group or sub-groups to which the entity belongs, then an incremental consolidation should be performed for the entity. When currency translation is performed for an entity, then an incremental consolidation should also be performed, regardless of when the last consolidation was run.


2011

BPC440


Figure 171: Translation Selections

2011


249


BPC440

How to Set Work Status In the Consolidation Monitor 242

1.

Choose an Entity and click Work Status

2.

Select the next work state and choose OK

3.

Click refresh to see the updated status As a result, the work state will prohibit manual journal entries for example for that Entity as well as the Category and Year/Month that you are using in the Consolidation Monitor.

Controls Monitor In this section you will learn how to use the Controls Monitor. The Controls Monitor enables you to execute and monitor controls. Controls are run on a selected entity or group of entities. The Controls Monitor displays the Group/Entity structure based on the hierarchy created in the Ownership Manager for Consolidation type models. Note: Controls can also be used for Financial type models. Controls Monitor Features: • • • • • •

250

Visibility Details at your fingertips Linked source documents and reports Column sorting Display member descriptions Status Reset


2011

BPC440


Figure 172: Controls Monitor

The Controls Monitor is split into the following areas: •

At the top, the scope context area This displays the selected dimension members: Time, Category, Entity, and any other dimension used as a driving dimension in the work status definition: To modify the dimension members displayed in the scope context area, click the linked members to display the Member Selector dialog box.

•

In the middle, a list of control sets organized by entity, displaying the control status and the number of blocking or warning controls In a Consolidation model, only the members belonging to the Group dimension are displayed. In a Finance model, only the entities belonging to the Entity dimension are displayed.

•

At the bottom is a detailed list of failed controls for selected members. Each time you select a different member in the control set list, the list of failed controls is refreshed.

Prerequisites To Use Controls: 1. 2. 3.

You have been assigned the Display Controls security task Work status is turned on Controls have been configured and enabled

Journals In this section you will learn how to use the Journals workspace.

2011


251


BPC440

You use journals to record and make adjustments to data in the database. This is typically done as part of the month-end or quarter-end process. For example, administrators load general ledger information into a model using the Data Manager. Before the close, line managers can review the data and make adjustments as necessary using a journal entry. Journals Workspace Features: • • •

List journal IDs Select journals based on your context or advanced search criteria Select columns to display Note: You will learn more details in the Journal lesson.

Figure 173: Journal Landing with All Journals Displayed

When creating a journal entry, the following interface is used.

252


2011

BPC440


Figure 174: A Balanced Journal Entry

Ownership Manager In this section we will learn about the features of the Ownership Manager. The Ownership Manager in the Consolidation Central module enables you to create and manage ownership based hierarchies used for performing statutory elimination. An ownership based hierarchy shows the parent child relationships by time and category based on transaction data stored in the Ownership Model.

Figure 175: Ownership Manager from Consolidation Central

2011


253


BPC440

Facilitated Discussion Review the key features of Consolidation Central

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. Which component would you set the work state in?

254


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain how to use the Consolidation Monitor • Determine when to use Full vs. Incremental Processing • Describe the Controls Monitor • Discuss the Journals Workspace • Describe the Ownership Manager

2011


255


Lesson: 247

BPC440

Setting up Journals Lesson Duration: 65 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn about scenarios for using journals, how to set them up, how to control them, and how to post journals.


Explain how to use journals in a controlled scenario Execute journal reports Build a journal template Describe the journal settings Create journals in one or several periods at once

Now that we have loaded the raw data, we may need to post adjusting entries such as when subsidiaries report finished goods inventory but from a group perspective, it is really work in process. Be prepared to discuss the pros and cons of creating adjusting entries in BPC. Some customers are ok with some standardizing entries while other want to do those in the source system and load to BPC.

Business Example You need to create top side group level adjusting entries during your closing process and so you are interested in the capability of journals and the associated control mechanisms.

Business Reasons for Journals In this section, we will cover the business reasons for journals.

256


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Setting up Journals

Reasons to Use Planning and Consolidation Journals: • •

Group adjusting entries Correct errors from source systems - only if absolutely necessary

You use journals to record and make adjustments to data in the database. This is typically done as part of the month-end or quarter-end process. For example, administrators load general ledger information into a model using the Data Manager. Before the close, line managers can review the data and make adjustments, as necessary, using a journal entry template. Note: Some customers are okay with a reasonable number of standardizing entries in the Planning and Consolidation solution against a unique data source for clarity. If there was an error in the source system, most people would like to make that fix in the source and load that corrected data again. Other companies don’t want any journal entries in this system because it makes reconciliation more difficult since the source system will remain unchanged.

Posting Journals In this section, you will see how to create a single period posting and copy to the subsequent period. After the template is created and security is in place, journals can be used. A journal posting updates the InfoCube and the Journal detail table.

Figure 176: Journal Overview

2011


257


BPC440

Journals can be used to adjust imported data as well as data after eliminations. For each journal several detail rows can be saved. To provide this functionality, a set of internal tables are used. The aggregated figure per journal ID will be stored in the Model. This means that detailed journal information is stored in system tables, aggregated totals of these journals are stored in the cube. Note: Data manager packages do not create journal entries in the Planning and Consolidation application. For example, when you run the eliminations package, no journal entry is created although records are inserted into the InfoCube. There is a log kept in the data manager and you can also use the data audit reports as well. Journal activity takes place exclusively in the web interface. The journal landing can display existing journals based on your context selections.

Figure 177: The Journals Landing Page

The Journals Landing Page includes the following options: Journal Landing Options

258

Option

Action

Context dimensions

Select members to filter the list of existing journal IDs. Only the journal header dimensions are included in the context.

Model

Select the Model to work in

New

Create new journal

Open

Open existing

Post / Unpost

Post or Unpost existing


2011

BPC440


Reopen

Reopen a journal id. This will copy a prior journal to a new id and use the mappings you define for the source and target dimension values.

Report

Opens a report for a journal id or id;s

Lock

Locks a journal id

Preview

Displays the journal line items

More (>>)

Switch between Context and Advanced Query selections.

To create a new journal, choose New. In the Journal Header (shown below) these options allow you to perform advanced functions. •

Balanced: This option allows you to require that journals are balanced upon posting.

•

Reopen in Next Period: This option allows you to reopen (copy) the journal entry to another account in a subsequent time period.

•

Auto Reverse: This option allows you to reverse the credit or debit value in the journal entry in the next time period. Note: This option sets up a new journal with saved status; it does not create postings.

•

Multiple Headers Use this option to post multiple periods in one journal id for example

•

Multiple Values Use this option to post different values per month for example

2011


259


BPC440

Figure 178: Journal Header

In the example below, you can see an out of balance journal by Entity.

Figure 179: Out of balance by Entity

After the second line item is switched to the same Entity, the journal can be posted.

Figure 180: In Balance

260


2011

BPC440


Journals can be copied to the next period for example. Note: When using a Model in YTD Data Entry Mode, it may be necessary to copy journals from month to month if the adjusting entry applies to every month. Remember that for YTD models, reports do not add data from prior periods to display YTD data. As a result, journal values in January would not appear in a February YTD report, for example.

Figure 181: Copy To

Control Points In this section, you will learn the key control points for journals. How to Control Journal Activity

2011

The Control

How it Works

Limit which dimension members can be posted to

The ENABLEJRN dimension property with a value of Y

Lock a data intersection for Journals

Work status with a work state of Locked for the Journal Interface

Prevent invalid member combinations

Characteristic validation


261


BPC440

Journal security tasks

Assign journal tasks to users / teams

Balance in total

Activate the Enforce Balanced Journals parameter in the journal template

Balance by entity and / or currency

Activate the Balanced by Entity and Balanced by Currency parameters in the journal template

The Journal Security Tasks and what they allow are shown below. 1.

Manage - Create and maintain journal templates - Clear journal tables - Create journals

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Edit - Create or modify journal entries Post - Post journal entries View - View journal entries UnPost - Unpost journal entries Lock / UnLock - Lock and unlock journal entries ReOpen - Reopen journal entries

Journal Reporting In this section, you will learn about journal reporting. In the Journal Landing Page below, you can see how you can view a list of journals and their status. Note: Group ID is used when creating multi period journals for example.

262


2011

BPC440


Figure 182: Journals Workspace With All Journals Displayed

The Journal Landing Page will display journals according to your context selections by default. You can change your filter criteria however by using the Advanced Query.

Figure 183: Using The Advanced Query Selection

The Advanced Query allows you to select journals on multiple criteria.

2011


263


BPC440

Figure 184: The Advanced Query Selection Options

By choosing one or more journals and Report you can view the header and line item data for a journal. You can also then Print or Print HTML. You can generate and print reports based on journal entries. These reports, which are web-based, represent an audit trail of all journal entries. The printed journal entry report contains all postings for the selected journal entry or entries.

Figure 185: A Detailed Journal Report

264


2011

BPC440


The following information displays for auditing purposes: • • •

Model - Model that the journal is posted in ID - The journal id Status - The current status of the journal entry. Statuses include Saved, Posted, Unposted, and New.

• • • • • • •

Created By - Who created the journal Modified On - When the journal was modified Posted On - When the Journal was posted Original ID - If a journal entry is reopened, the old journal ID is the ID of the original entry. Group ID - Taken from the first Journal ID in the Group. Description - The journal header description Dimensions and Members - Dimensions and members in the header

Journal Templates In this section, we will discuss how to set up journal templates and the related properties. Note: Each Model can only have one journal template. In the Administration tab below, you can manage journals by Model.

Figure 186: Journal Administration

2011


265


BPC440

Journal Administration Options Option

Action

New

Create a new journal template

Open

Open existing templates

Delete Template

Delete a journal template (if the detail table is empty)

Journal Parameters

Maintain the settings to Enforce Balanced Journals and Allow Journals to be Reopened

Delete Journals

Delete the journal detail table contents

When creating a new template, you must choose which dimensions to keep in the header vs. the row detail. Note: The account and subtable dimension must always be in the Detail Column.

Figure 187: Journal Header

The following three journal model parameters are available: 1.

Enforce Balanced Journals Select this parameter to specify that journals must be balanced when they are posted.

2.

Allow Journals to be Reopened Select this parameter to allow users to reopen journals. If selected, the Reopen button appears in the toolbar in the Journals page of Consolidation Central.

3.

Reuse IDs for Previously Posted Journals

Select this parameter to have the system keep the same journal ID when saving journals that were previously set to Posted status, but changed to Unposted status.

266


2011

BPC440


If this parameter is not selected, a new ID is generated when the unposted journal is saved. Additional Headers can be added to your template. Use the Text type to record textual information with the journal detail data. Note: If you use the Text type, then you will need to Add / Maintain Values. For example, use an Additional Header of US GAAP Adjustments and values such as Labor, Depreciation, Inventory. Use the Date type to record a date in the journal detail data. Note: You could then use the data for cash flow forecasting or to record an approval date. The system does not require additional header items, but your business process may. If they are present in your journal entry form, they are not required to post a journal entry.

Figure 188: Journal Additional Headers

Advanced Posting Options In this section, you will create a multi period multi values posting. We will also learn how to reopen a journal and use journal BAdIs and logic. In addition, if you need to change a template, you can do so without clearing the detail table except if you need to move dimensions from the line items to the header. Changing Journal Templates

2011

Change

Impact on Journal Detail Table

Balancing parameters

None

ReOpen parameter

None


267


BPC440

Move dimensions from the header to line items

None

Move dimensions from the line items to the header

Must be deleted

Change reopen rules

None

You can post a journal for multiple months at a time. To do this, select Multiple Values. When you select the Multiple Values checkbox, the associated dimensions member lookup then becomes available. Note: With Multiple Values, you can use different values per month, for example.

Figure 189: Multiple Values Per Month

You can also post a journal for multiple dimension member values at a time. To do this, use the Multiple Headers checkbox. When you select the Multiple Headers checkbox, the associated Dimensions member lookup then becomes available.

268


2011

BPC440


Figure 190: Multi Posting Tab

You can reopen one or more journal entries from a previous period, and post them to another set of accounts for the following period. To reopen journals, these are the prerequisites: •

The administrator has customized the reopen translation table. The translation table defines the source and destination accounts for the reopening of journals. You define translations on accounts and define criteria on other dimensions. Caution: The translation table referred to above is not for currency translation. It is a mapping table with source and target members IDs.

• • •

2011

The system is set to allow for reopening of journals using the Allow Journals to be Reopened journal parameter. The selected source journal entries are posted to the database. The Reopen in Next Period option is selected in the journal entry.


269


BPC440

Figure 191: Reopening a Journal

To use reopening, the Account Group and the Source and Target dimensions must be specified. Note: There are four account types: AST, EXP, INC, and LEQ. Each row must include one. Note: The Filtering Property returns a list of accounts to which the reopen rule is applied.

270


2011

BPC440


Figure 192: Journal Reopen Rules

When saving a journal, you can add calculations by implementing the Business Add-In (BAdI): UJJ_CALCULATED_AMOUNT . You can also use logic that only applies to incoming data via Journal Entries by adding script to a file named JOURNAL.LGF. Additionally, whenever the JOURNAL.LGF is used, the logic in the DEFAULT.LGF logic file will not be called for journal entries. In the screenshot below, you can see the data from a database view.

Figure 193: Journal Detail Table

2011


271


BPC440

How to Look up Journal Detail Tables 262

1.

In the BW server, goto SE16

2.

Enter the table name: UJA_APPSET_INFO and choose Enter

3.

Choose F8. Note your Environment prefix → Green arrow back twice

4.

Enter: UJA_APPL and choose Enter

5.

Select your Environment: BPC440_##

6.

Choose F8.. Note your LEGAL prefix → Green arrow back twice

7.

Enter the journal details table: /1CPMB/xxzzzJRDT (xx is your Environment: prefix and zzz is your Model prefix) → Enter → F8

Result You can now see your journal details.

How to Upload Journals In scenarios where you need to book numerous journal entries, you may want to consider uploading them with the following procedure.

272


2011

BPC440


How to upload journals 263

1.

Post at least one journal entry in the system.

2.

In the Data Manager choose Organize package list

3.

Right click in the yellow area → Add package → Select →Business Planning and Consolidation: Other Function → BPC: Export Journal

4.

Add the BPC: Export Journal package to your Model

5.

Use the same process to add the BPC: Restore Journal package to your Model

6.

Execute the package BPC: Export Journal to generate the flat file

7.

Insert new journal IDs into the flat file

8.

Execute the package BPC: Restore Journal to upload the new journals.

Result The InfoCube and journal detail tables are updated.

2011


273


274


BPC440

2011

BPC440

265


Exercise 10: Configure and Use Journal Templates Exercise Duration: 65 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure a journal template • Create journal entries • Run journal reports • Copy and reopen journal entries into subsequent periods

Business Example Depending on your corporate strategy, you may need to make standardizing entries in Planning and Consolidation. For example, when the subsidiary is too aggressive in booking depreciation, or when the subsidiary books to the finished goods inventory what is actually work in process from a group perspective. You may also run into some situations where fixing an error is a last resort. Therefore, you need to know how to set up journal templates for models, create journal entries, and report on the results.

Task 1: Configure the Journals Template for your Legal model. 1.

Go to Journals configuration.


2011


275


BPC440

Figure 194: Journals Administration

2.

Activate balancing and reopening in your Legal model parameters.

3.

Create a new template. Activate balancing by entity and move Intco to Headers.

4.

Add an additional header for closing and timing. For closing, add values for depreciation, FGI, and labor. These will be used to provide supplemental documentation for the journal postings.

5.

Add reopen rules so that when a journal with cash and AR is reopened (copied), the signs are reversed.

Task 2: Create a new journal entry. 1.

Access the Journal Landing Page for your Legal model.

2.

Set your context as shown below:

3.

Dimension

Member ID and Description

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

C_Category

PLAN - Plan

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

Intco


C_Datasrc

ADJUSTMENT - Adjustment

Create a new journal. Continued on next page

276


2011

BPC440


4.

Enter the following to test Balancing by Entity. Then change the second record to Company C1000. Entity

C_Acct

Flow

Debit

C1000

12120300

F_CB

15

C2000

30527140

F_CB

Credit 15

5.

Add depreciation as an additional property and a date of July 4, 2011.

6.

Save and then post.

7.

Run a report on the journal ID.

8.

Go back to the Journal landing page. Your entry should appear here.

Task 3: Copy an existing journal. 1.

From the Journal landing page, copy your entry into the next month.

2.

On the Journal landing page, switch your filter criteria from Context to Advanced Query for 2012.01.

3.

Post the copied journal.

Task 4: Test the reopening feature on a new journal ID. 1.

Open a new journal with the description Test Reopening and activate the reopening option.

2.

Post the data as shown below. Entity

C_Acct

Flow

Debit

C1000

11112000

F_CB

20

C1000

11211000

F_CB

Credit 20

3.

On the Journal landing page, set your filter criteria back to Context so you can access your Test Reopening entry.

4.

Reopen the “Test Reopening” entry.

5.

Change your Journal landing filter to 2012.03 and Forecast. View the entry. It should be the reverse of the original. You can then post it.


2011


277


BPC440

Task 5: Create a multiple period and category posting. 1.

Open a new journal. Use the description Multi Period Posting.

2.

Activate multiple headers for C_Category for actual and budget.

3.

Activate multiple values for time: 2012.01 to 2012.03.

4.

Enter the data as shown below.


278

5.

Confirm that you are posting to Actual and Budget on the Multi Posting tab.

6.

Post the entries.

7.

On the Journal landing page, change your filter to display all entries. Set the advanced query for all categories and USD, but with no other filters.

8.

Review all of your entries.


2011

BPC440


Solution 10: Configure and Use Journal Templates Task 1: Configure the Journals Template for your Legal model. 1.

Go to Journals configuration.

Figure 196: Journals Administration

a)

From the Home tab on the Start Page, choose Planning and Consolidation Administration → Features → Journals.


2011


279


2.

BPC440

Activate balancing and reopening in your Legal model parameters. a)

Choose Legal → Journal Parameters.

b)

Select both options:

Figure 197: Journal Parameters

c) 3.

4.

Choose OK.

Create a new template. Activate balancing by entity and move Intco to Headers. a)

Access the template configuration screen: Choose Legal → New.

b)

Select Balanced by Entity.

c)

In the Detail Column for Header, choose Intco and move it left to Headers.

Add an additional header for closing and timing. For closing, add values for depreciation, FGI, and labor. These will be used to provide supplemental documentation for the journal postings. a)

Under Additional Headers, choose Add.

b)

Enter Closing as a Description and choose OK.

c)

Highlight the row for Closing and chooseAdd / Maintain Values. Hint: When entering Values below, doubleclick the field to allow input.

d)

Choose Add. Continued on next page

280


2011

BPC440


e)

Under Value, enter FGI.

f)

Choose Add.

g)

In row 2, enter Depreciation.

h)

Choose Add.

i)

In row 3, enter Labor and choose OK. You now have 3 values for the Closing Header.

j)

Under Additional Headers, choose Add. Note: The Date header could be used to document an approval date, or a date when the value could affect cash flow, for example.

k)

In Description, enter Timing.

l)

Under Type, select Date and click OK.

Figure 198: Journal Additional Headers

You have now added two additional headers.


2011


281


5.

BPC440

Add reopen rules so that when a journal with cash and AR is reopened (copied), the signs are reversed. a)

Next to Headers, choose the Reopen Rules tab.

b)

Choose Add and enter row 1 as shown below: Hint: To enter AST, doubleclick the new row. To select the account, hover over the field and you will see a dropdown box. However, if your cursor is already in the field, you will not see a dropdown box.

c)

Choose Add and enter row 2 as shown below:

Figure 199: Journal Reopen Rules

When a journal with cash and AR is reopened (copied), the signs will be reversed. d)

Choose Save → Close.


282


2011

BPC440


Task 2: Create a new journal entry. 1.

2.

Access the Journal Landing Page for your Legal model. a)

From the Home tab on the Start Page, choose Consolidation Central → Journals.

b)

On the upper right, select your Legal model.

Set your context as shown below: Dimension

Member ID and Description

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

C_Category

PLAN - Plan

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

Intco


C_Datasrc


a) 3.

Left click the context members to access the dropdown box and make your selections as shown above.

Create a new journal. a)

Choose New. The New Journal tab opens.

b) 4.

Enter the description Depreciation Entry.

Enter the following to test Balancing by Entity. Then change the second record to Company C1000.


2011


283


BPC440

Entity

C_Acct

Flow

Debit

C1000

12120300

F_CB

15

C2000

30527140

F_CB

a)

Credit 15

On the Journal Entries tab, enter the values as shown above. Your screen will look like the one below

Figure 200: Out of Balance by Entity

You have successfully tested the balance by entity feature. b)

Switch the second entry to C1000 via the dropdown box.

Figure 201: In Balance


284


2011

BPC440


5.

Add depreciation as an additional property and a date of July 4, 2011. a)

Choose Additional Properties and make your settings as shown below.

Figure 202: Additional Properties

6.

Save and then post. a)

Choose Save. Note: Enter through any messages regarding saving invalid values.

b)

Choose Post. A pop-up appears: Are you sure you want to post the following journals?

c)

Choose OK.


2011


285


7.

BPC440

Run a report on the journal ID. a)

On the upper right, select Report.

Figure 203: Journal Report

A detailed report of your journal is generated. b)

Close the Journal Report 1 tab.


286


2011

BPC440


8.

Go back to the Journal landing page. Your entry should appear here. a)

Choose the Home tab. Note: Your context may display dimensions in a different order to the one shown below.

Figure 204: Journal Landing

Your journal appears because the context members are the same as the journal.


2011


287


BPC440

Task 3: Copy an existing journal. 1.

From the Journal landing page, copy your entry into the next month. a)

Select your depreciation entry and choose Copy To. The Copy To dialog appears.

b)

Select Copy to the next period.

Figure 205: Copy To

c)

Choose OK.


288


2011

BPC440


2.

On the Journal landing page, switch your filter criteria from Context to Advanced Query for 2012.01. a)

On the upper right, choose More → Advanced Query.

Figure 206: Select Advanced Query

b)

Select 2012.01.

Figure 207: Advanced Query Options

c)

Choose OK. The copied journal should now appear.


2011


289


3.

BPC440

Post the copied journal. a)

Highlight the copied journal and choose Post. A pop-up appears: Are you sure you want to post the following journals?

b)

Choose OK.

Task 4: Test the reopening feature on a new journal ID. 1.

2.

Open a new journal with the description Test Reopening and activate the reopening option. a)

Choose New.

b)

Enter the description Test Reopening.

c)

Select Reopen in Next Period.

Post the data as shown below. Entity

C_Acct

Flow

Debit

C1000

11112000

F_CB

20

C1000

11211000

F_CB

a)

Enter your data as shown above.

b)

Choose Post.

Credit 20

A pop-up appears: Are you sure you want to post the following journals? c) 3.

Choose OK.

On the Journal landing page, set your filter criteria back to Context so you can access your Test Reopening entry. a)

On the Journal landing page, choose More → Context.


290


2011

BPC440


4.

Reopen the “Test Reopening” entry. a)

Highlight the Test Reopening entry and choose Reopen. Make the following selections:

Figure 208: Reopening Selections

b) 5.

Choose OK.

Change your Journal landing filter to 2012.03 and Forecast. View the entry. It should be the reverse of the original. You can then post it. a)

Choose More → Advanced Query. Hint: If you have any difficulty selecting Advanced Query, close the Web client and relaunch it.


2011


291


BPC440


b)

Set the time to 2012.03 and FORECAST and choose OK.

c)

Click the Journal ID and check if the values are reversed as shown below:

Figure 210: Reopen Result

d)

Choose Post. A pop-up appears: Are you sure you want to post the following journals?

e)

Choose OK. Close all New Journal tabs.


292


2011

BPC440


Task 5: Create a multiple period and category posting. 1.

Open a new journal. Use the description Multi Period Posting. a)

Choose New. A New Journal tab is generated.

b) 2.

3.

4.

In the Description, enterMulti Period Posting.

Activate multiple headers for C_Category for actual and budget. a)

Choose Multiple Headers → Choose the dropdown → Select C_Category.

b)

Select Actual and Budget.

c)

Choose OK.

Activate multiple values for time: 2012.01 to 2012.03. a)

Choose Multiple Values → Choose the dropdown → Select Time.

b)

Select 2012.01, 2012.02, and 2012.03.

Enter the data as shown below.


a)

On the Journal Entries tab, enter your values as shown above.


2011


293


5.

BPC440

Confirm that you are posting to Actual and Budget on the Multi Posting tab. a)

Choose the Multi Posting tab.

Figure 212: Multi Posting Tab

You can see the Actual and Budget members that will be posted as well as the three months. 6.

Post the entries. a)

Choose Post. A pop-up appears: Are you sure you want to post the following journals? IDs 5 - 10 will appear.

b)

Choose OK.


294


2011

BPC440


7.

On the Journal landing page, change your filter to display all entries. Set the advanced query for all categories and USD, but with no other filters. a)

Choose Home → More → Advanced Query.


b)

Set your advanced query as shown below. Hint: When you hover on a row, a green + and a red - appear on the right. Use the red - icon to delete filters.

Figure 214: Advanced Query for All Categories

c)

Choose OK.


2011


295


8.

BPC440

Review all of your entries. a)

Your list should look similar to the following. Hint: You can sort the ID column by clicking the column header.

Figure 215: Journal Landing with All Journals Displayed

296


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain how to use journals in a controlled scenario • Execute journal reports • Build a journal template • Describe the journal settings • Create journals in one or several periods at once

2011


297


Lesson: 288

BPC440

Translating Local Currency Lesson Duration: 60 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn the business reasons and setup for currency translation.


Discuss the high level concepts of currency translation Configure the business rules Review the results and explain the calculations

We are not trying to teach CPA concepts here too much since that would take too long. If students are new to this concept, we want to give them the high level concepts. Make sure that you stress that every company has a currency guru, and THAT is the person who has to bless the result of your configuration. If you just say the word FASB52 or the equivalent IFRS standard, the CPAs will automatically be in tune with you! The dimension type G was new in 7.5 and permits the calculation of multiple group currencies by adding multiple currencies into currency type dimension in the group dimension. In 10.0, currency works the same way with respect to the business rules, we just have better screens to work with.

Business Example Financial data reported by consolidation units is usually transferred to corporate in local currency. You need to translate this data to group currency before you can create consolidated financial statements.

The Business Reasons In this section, you will learn the business reasons for currency translation.

298


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Translating Local Currency

Here are a few key points regarding currency translation: • • • • • •

Subsidiaries usually feed their trial balances to corporate in local currency Currency translation converts local currency values into group currency The original local currency values are unchanged Various exchange rates are stored in the Rate Model by month by category Different exchange rates (average, end, historical) need to be applied to different accounts The Business Rule Table is used to apply different rates to accounts based on their assigned rate type

In the example below you can see a conceptual example of the local currency values coming in from the subsidiary. The assets are translated at an end rate for the current period and the prior year to generate a difference. The inventory acquisition value is current so therefore the average rate is being used and there is no difference.

Figure 216: Currency Translation - Big Picture

The default currency translation supplied with the product for multicurrency models performs a cross rate translation. It multiplies the amount in local currency by the ratio between the destination and source currency rates. This allows the model to use only one rate table for translating any source currency into any destination currency.

2011


299


BPC440

The default translation reads all values in local currency where currency = LC, applies the desired exchange rate according to the applicable rate model, and writes the results in the appropriate reporting currency (USD, EUR, and so on).

The Business Rule Component In this section you will learn the business rule component of currency translation.

Figure 217: Sample Business Rule

300


2011

BPC440


Currency Business Rule Field Definitions • • •

ID - This is the rate type. It is used to select accounts for translation. Description - Description of the rule. The source flow - can be a valid base level or parent member ID from the flow dimension or several flow members as identified by their dimlist properties. The following statement summarizes how the rate type and source flow are used together: For accounts with a rate type of X and source flow values of Y then apply this rule.

• • •

Destination account - The account that stores the converted value. If empty, it is the same as the source account member. Destination flow - The flow member that stores the converted value. If empty, then it is the same as the source member. Formula - The factor to apply to the source value. This field can contain any arithmetic expression including members in the account dimension of the rate model. All members in the rate model’s account dimension with the rate type property value of FX can be used.

• •

•

•

Force closing - If checked, the system will also write a value into the closing balance in an additional record. Periodic Calc - This field should only be used in a YTD Model when the currency translation should be performed on the monthly value only. If the box is checked, the difference between current period and prior period amounts is applied to the rate specified in the FORMULA column. Entity Fx Type - This field can be used to enforce a given set of rules for specific Entities. If this field has a value, the rule will only be applied to the Entities having a matching value in the property named FX_TYPE. Remarks - Comments.

The Currency Keywords The currency key words are used in the business rule formula to select rates for the calculation. • • • • • •

2011

END - uses the end of month rate AVG - uses the average rate COPYLC - translate the local currency to group currency with a factor of 1 OPEEND - the end rate of the last period of the prior year AS_IS - leave untouched values already in the target currency OPEAVG - the average rate of the last period of the prior year


301


BPC440

The Results In this section you will see how currency translation can be used in a business example and how the business rules generate the values. This is an example of currency translation for one asset account and one entity.

Figure 218: Currency Translation Result Local Currency = EUR)

Below is the business rule to translate F_OB - Opening Balance for accounts that have a rate type of ENDFLOW.

Figure 219: Opening - 2011.Dec

302


2011

BPC440


Below is the business rule to translate F_ACQ - Acquisition amounts for accounts that have a rate type of ENDFLOW.

Figure 220: Increase

Below is the business rule to translate F_CB - Closing Balance for accounts that have a rate type of ENDFLOW.

2011


303


BPC440

Figure 221: Ending

Below you can see the currency translation explanations. 1.

The 120,000 is the opening balance translated using the prior year end rate. It could have been populated as is via balance carry forward but this is essentially we are doing what point 5 did at the end of last year by translating the local currency opening balance at the opening end rate.

2.

The 30,000 is the acquisition translated at the average rate. Typically on acquisitions of long term assets, accountants will use the average rate for a transaction that occurred during the month because it is current.

3.

The 10,000 is the current end rate minus the prior year end rate for the opening balance. This is the currency translation effect on opening balance amounts for the change in the end rates. This is useful for cash flow analysis.

4.

The 4,000 is the current end rate minus the current period average rate for acquisitions. This is the currency translation effect on acquisition amounts. This is also useful for cash flow analysis.

5.

The 156,000 is the closing balance translated at the current end rate. This should equal the sum of detailed movements above.

304


2011

BPC440


When to Run Currency Translation Currency Translation Can Be Run Multiple Ways: When

How

Does it use Script Logic?

In Batch Mode:

Consolidation Monitor

No

Data Manager

Yes

On a real time basis

Default Logic is executed for each data submission

Yes

Examples of when the batch mode option would be useful: • • • •

Run at the end of day after all data is collected After data imports Run after rate updates As part of a standard consolidation cycle, once data for all reporting units has been submitted and validated.

Executing currency translation on a real time basis may be applicable when you need to report on multiple currencies right after a data import.

The Currency Translation Process This is a summary of the overall steps in the process to do currency translation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

2011

Data is sent to the database via a data manager import, an input schedule, or a journal entry. Currency translation is either initiated immediately or scheduled via a Data Manager package. For a given record, the source currency is determined from the value in the CURRENCY property of the corresponding entity member. The target currency is determined via the Group dimension or is selected. The Rate type is determined from the RATETYPE property of the Account type dimension. Based on the RATETYPE, the system then determines from the Business Rules tables what logic to apply and what Exchange rates should be applied. The function then determines the appropriate rates for translation from the local reporting currency of the entity to the target currency, and creates the appropriate records in the Consolidation Model.


305


BPC440

The Logic File Component When currency translation is run via the data manager, the FXTRANS logic script is executed. Note: When currency translation is run from the Consolidation Monitor, the program is read directly and the logic script is not used.

Figure 222: Legal Fxtrans

Note: If running currency translation for the reporting currency, the keyword on the left side should be CURRENCY. If running currency translation for a group, use the keyword GROUP. Note: To have the script execute in Full Translation mode, use INCREMENTAL_MODE = X Use INCREMENTAL_MODE =___ (blank) to run in Incremental Translation mode.

The Legal Model Component The Legal Model stores the trial balances that will need to be translated. Below you can see the dimension properties for example that are important for currency translation.

306


2011

BPC440


Legal Model Dimensions - Focus on Currency Translation Dimension Type

Important Currency Related Requirements

Entity

The required property is: Currency, which stores the local currency of the Entity.

Group

The required properties are: • •

Currency_Type whose values are G for group currency or N for non-group currency Group_Currency whose values are the group currency(s) such as USD

Category

This same category dimension must also be used in the Rate Model.

Currency


Account

The required property is: •

Flow

RateType whose values are AVG, END, and so on

The required property is: •

Time

Reporting whose values are Y or blank Currency_Type whose values are T for transaction currency, R for Reporting, and L for local currency.

FlowType. There are no special values for currency translation.

The required properties are: • Year with values like 2011, 2012 • Period with values like JUN, JUL • TimeID with values like 201206, 201207 • Monthnum with values like 6, 7 The same time dimension must also be used in the Rate Model.

DataSource


2011

Datasrc_Type whose values are I – Input, M – Manual Adjustment, A – Eliminations and Adjustments IS_Converted whose values include: N – these members are ignored in the conversion, Y (or blank) – these members are converted from LC into the desired currency, and G - these members are entered in a reporting currency are translated to group currency.


307


BPC440

Note: The system does not convert accounts with a rate type that is not a part of the currency conversion business rule. Accounts with a blank rate type are translated with a factor 1. Note: As of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Version 10.0, both group dimension and a currency dimension are required. Therefore, consolidation group members and currency members are stored separately.

The Rate Model Component The Rate Model stores rates by month and category. All of the rates are per the group currency. Note: The group currency designation is specified in the group dimension. Rates are normally loaded into the Rate Model from financial service companies.

Figure 223: Rate Report

308


2011

BPC440


Rate Model Dimensions Dimension Type

Important Currency Related Requirements

Category

The same category dimension must also be used in the Legal Model.

Currency

Currency members must have an M or D (Multiply Divide) property value. M is for direct rates and D is for indirect rates.

Entity

At a minimum the GLOBAL member must be stored in this dimension.

Account

Time

Members such as END, AVG, HISTFLOW are also rate type values in the Legal Model’s account dimension. In addition, they must have a RATETYPE property value of FX. The same time dimension must also be used in the Legal Model.

Note: You can use the Entity dimension members to store Entity specific exchange rates.

How to Translate Multiple Group Currencies Occasionally some companies need to report in multiple group currencies.

2011


309


BPC440

How to Translate Multiple Group Currencies 299

1.

Goto Administration

2.

Open the Group dimension

3.

Add multiple currencies into the Group_Currency property separated by commas.

4.

Process the dimension

5.

Run currency translation from the Consolidation Monitor

Result Confirm the results with an excel template or web report.

310


2011

BPC440

301


Exercise 11: Configure Currency Translation Exercise Duration: 50 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure the currency translation business rule • Run currency translation • Explain how the system generated the data

Business Example You are performing legal consolidations and since you have offshore operations, you need to translate all of the local currencies into the group currency.

Task 1: Run a report on the exchange rates stored in the Rates model. 1.

Open the Excel interface of the EPM add-in and create a connection to the Rate model.

2.

Set your EPM context as shown below: Dimension


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

InputCurrency

AUS - Australian Dollars

RateEntity

GLOBAL - Global

R_Acct

AVG - Average Rate

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

PER- Periodic

Task 2: Review the exchange rates. 1.

Confirm that rates exist in the BPC440 Rates report.

2.

Save the template.


2011


311


BPC440

Task 3: Configure the Currency Translation business rule. 1.

Activate the Currency Translation rule type for your Legal model.

2.

Configure a rule for accounts with the AVG rate type as shown below:

Figure 224: AVG Rule

3.

Configure a rule for accounts with the ENDFLOW rate type as shown below:

Figure 225: ENDFLOW Rule

4.

Configure a rule for accounts with the HISTFLOW rate type as shown below:


312


2011

BPC440


Figure 226: HISTFLOW Rule

5.

Configure a rule for accounts with the AVGFLOW rate type as shown below.

Figure 227: AVGFLOW Rule

6.

Configure a rule for accounts with the HISTINV rate type as shown below.

Figure 228: HISTINV Rule

Task 4: Review the currency translation logic script for the Legal model. 1.

Review the FXTRANS LGF script logic file. It should match the one below.


2011


313


BPC440


2.

Return to logic scripts.

Task 5: Execute the FX Restatement package for the Legal model. 1.

Connect to Legal.

2.

In the EPM add-in, run the FX Restatement package for the following selections: Dimension

Member

Company

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12


Set your EPM context as shown below. Dimension


Company

C1000 - Germany

Consgroup


314


2011

BPC440

2011


C_Acct

Any value is okay

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow

Any value is okay

Intco


Rptcurrency

Any value is okay

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

2.

In the EPM add-in, open the BPC440 Machinery Currency Translation report.

3.

Save the template.


315


BPC440

Solution 11: Configure Currency Translation Task 1: Run a report on the exchange rates stored in the Rates model. 1.

Open the Excel interface of the EPM add-in and create a connection to the Rate model. a)


b)

Choose Create.

c)


Figure 230: Create Connection

d)

Choose Connect.

e)

Enter your user ID and password to create the connection.

f)

User ID

Password

BPC-##

training

Logon Continued on next page

316


2011

BPC440


Environments and models are loaded. g)

h)

Use the dropdown list to select the environment and model. Environment

Model

BPC440_##

Rate

Choose Generate Connection Name. The system generates a connection name made up of the model ID and environment ID.

i)

Choose OK twice.

j)

Enter your user ID and password to access the EPM add-in for your environment and model.

k)

User ID

Password

BPC-##

training

Logon The EPM pane appears on the right.

2.

Set your EPM context as shown below: Dimension


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

InputCurrency

AUS - Australian Dollars

RateEntity

GLOBAL - Global

R_Acct

AVG - Average Rate

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

PER- Periodic

a)

Choose existing dimension members to access the EPM - Member Selector and then select the new members.


2011


317


BPC440

Task 2: Review the exchange rates. 1.

Confirm that rates exist in the BPC440 Rates report. a)


b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Rates → Open.

c)


Figure 231: Rate Report

2.



b)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 Rates.

c)

Choose Save.


318


2011

BPC440



Activate the Currency Translation rule type for your Legal model. a)


b)


c)

Under Administration of BPC440_##, highlight the row for Legal → Add / Remove Rule Types.

d)

Select Currency Translation and click OK Now the Currency Translation rule can be used.

2.

Configure a rule for accounts with the AVG rate type as shown below:


a)

Select the Currency Translation row and choose Open → New.

b)

Next to ID, select the AVG rate type ID from the dropdown list.

c)

Next to Description, enter Accounts with the AVG Rate Type.

d)

Make the other selections as shown above: Accounts with an AVG rate type will be translated into the same accounts and flow IDs at an average rate.

e) 3.

Choose Save and Close.

Configure a rule for accounts with the ENDFLOW rate type as shown below:


2011


319


BPC440

Figure 233: ENDFLOW Rule

a)

Under Currency Translation Rules: Legal, choose New.

b)

Next to ID, select the ENDFLOW rate type ID from the dropdown list.

c)

Next to Description, enter Accounts with ENDFLOW Rate Type.

d)

Make your other selections as shown above. Accounts with an ENDFLOW rate type will be translated into the same accounts at various rates.

e) 4.


Configure a rule for accounts with the HISTFLOW rate type as shown below:


320


2011

BPC440


Figure 234: HISTFLOW Rule

a)


b)

Next to ID, select the HISTFLOW rate type ID from the dropdown list.

c)

Next to Description, enter Accounts with HISTFLOW Rate Type.

d)

Make your other selections as shown above. Accounts with an HISTFLOW rate type will be translated into the same accounts and flow IDs at an end rate.

e) 5.


Configure a rule for accounts with the AVGFLOW rate type as shown below.


2011


321


BPC440

Figure 235: AVGFLOW Rule

a)


b)

Next to ID, select the AVGFLOW rate type ID from the dropdown list.

c)

Next to Description, enter Accounts with the AVGFLOW Rate Type.

d)

Make your other selections as shown above. Accounts with an AVGFLOW rate type will be translated into account 25815000 and flow ID F_TROB at the END minus AVG rate.

e) 6.


Configure a rule for accounts with the HISTINV rate type as shown below.

Figure 236: HISTINV Rule

a)


b)

Next to ID, select the HISTINV rate type ID from the dropdown list.

c)

Next to Description, enter Accounts with HISTINV Rate Type.

d)

Make your other selections as shown above. Accounts with an HISTINV rate type will be translated into the same account and flow ID at the END rate.

e)

Choose Save and Close. Continued on next page

322


2011

BPC440


Task 4: Review the currency translation logic script for the Legal model. 1.

Review the FXTRANS LGF script logic file. It should match the one below.


a)

Choose Return to Business Rules → Logic Scripts → Scripts for: Legal.

b)

Choose FXTRANS.LGF. Your logic is displayed.

2.

Return to logic scripts. a)


Task 5: Execute the FX Restatement package for the Legal model. 1.

Connect to Legal. a)

On the upper left, choose Log Off → Log On.

b)

Click the Connection ellipse button The EPM - Connection Manager opens.

2.

c)

Choose Connect.

d)

Click Legal - BPC440_## and choose OK.

In the EPM add-in, run the FX Restatement package for the following selections: Continued on next page

2011


323


BPC440

Dimension

Member

Company

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

a)


b)

Under Legal, choose Financial Process → FX Restatement→ Run.

c)


d)


e)

Choose View Status, double-click the log, and then choose the Formula Log to see the details.


f)

Close the popups.




Company

C1000 - Germany

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct

Any value is okay Continued on next page

324


2011

BPC440


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow

Any value is okay

Intco


Rptcurrency

Any value is okay

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a) 2.

Choose existing dimension members to access the EPM - Member Selector and then select your new member.

In the EPM add-in, open the BPC440 Machinery Currency Translation report. a)


b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Machinery Currency Translation→ Open .

c)

In the EPM add-in, choose Refresh.

Figure 239: Machinery Currency Translation Result

3.

2011



b)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 Machinery Currency Translation.

c)

Choose Save.


325


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss the high level concepts of currency translation • Configure the business rules • Review the results and explain the calculations

326


2011

BPC440

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Import transaction data from flat files • Import transaction data from BW InfoProviders • Explain the Merge, Replace and Clear, and Append options • Discuss data requirements for consolidation • Discuss the business scenario • Describe the components • Configure the business rules • Run balance carryforward • Discuss when to use reclassification • Describe the components • Configure the business rule • Run reclassification • Verify the results • Explain how to use the Consolidation Monitor • Determine when to use Full vs. Incremental Processing • Describe the Controls Monitor • Discuss the Journals Workspace • Describe the Ownership Manager • Explain how to use journals in a controlled scenario • Execute journal reports • Build a journal template • Describe the journal settings • Create journals in one or several periods at once • Discuss the high level concepts of currency translation • Configure the business rules • Review the results and explain the calculations

2011


327

Unit Summary

328

BPC440


2011

Unit 4 Configuring Eliminations

319

This is another unit where we need to be very clear that students are not expected to become COI experts. The reason this unit is before AP AR eliminations is that the ownership business rules must be in place for the program to work. The consolidations program does both ownership as well as AP AR etc eliminations.

Unit Overview In this unit we will discuss the reasons for performing consolidation of investments, why you may want to automate it using SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation and then you will configure the system and execute COI on live data and report on the results. We will also learn about the Intercompany Matching application. We will also discuss the basic concepts of eliminating inter unit activity, we’ll configure the system, test it, and report on the results.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2011

Discuss the concepts of Consolidation of Investments Personalize the Ownership Manager Create an ownership hierarchy Copy Ownership data to a different category and time Execute Ownership calculations Describe what the Business Rules do Configure business rules for a Purchase method scenario Identify the key dimensional properties Explain the results of the elimination job Configure business rules for an Equity and Proportional method State the possible reasons to use a separate Model for Matching Configure business rules to book differences Discuss the master data, properties, logic, and packages required


329

Unit 4: Configuring Eliminations

• • • • • •

BPC440

Describe the output generated Configure business rules for the Receivables and Payables elimination Recite the business reasons for eliminating intercompany activity Configure the US Elimination Business Rule for Revenue and Cost Describe the required master data properties Discuss the possibility of using this rule for managerial accounting

Unit Contents Lesson: Reviewing Ownership Terms and Concepts ......................331 Lesson: Using the Ownership Manager .....................................339 Procedure: How to Set Up Ownership Data ...........................345 Procedure: How to Calculate Ownership Data .........................348 Exercise 12: Create Investment Data in the Ownership Manager ...359 Lesson: Eliminating Ownership - Purchase Method .......................379 Procedure: How to Configure the Purchase Method Business Rules .........................................................................389 Exercise 13: Configure Business Rules for the Purchase Method...395 Lesson: Eliminating Ownership - Equity and Proportional Methods .....414 Exercise 14: Create the Equity Elimination Business Rules..........421 Exercise 15: Create the Proportional Business Rules.................435 Lesson: Matching Intercompany .............................................456 Exercise 16: Configure Intercompany Matching .......................465 Lesson: Eliminating Intercompany Receivables and Payables ...........480 Exercise 17: Create Business Rules for Intercompany Receivables and Payables Elimination .......................................................487 Lesson: Setting up Managerial Elimination (US) ...........................503 Exercise 18: Configure US Elimination ..................................509

330


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 321

Lesson: Reviewing Ownership Terms and Concepts

Reviewing Ownership Terms and Concepts Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn Consolidation of Investment concepts.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •

Discuss the concepts of Consolidation of Investments

Again in this unit we need to set the expectation that we are not here to make everyone into a COI guru! Our goal is to understand how to do the configuration and present the results to an expert and be able to make changes to the business rules if adjustments are required.

Business Example Your corporation has many legal subsidiaries and not all of them are wholly owned. There are a fair number of acquisitions and divestitures during the year as well, and that has helped to create a very long manual process to eliminate ownership and book minority interest during closes. You are therefore looking into automating that process as much as possible. You need to configure ownership elimination and so you need to learn all of the key concepts.

The Terms and Concepts In this section, we will cover the key terms and concepts. Hierarchies are used to keep track of the parent-child relationships. The ownership model is used to store the ownership data. The methods definitions are configured in the business rule tables. The method assignments are stored in the ownership model.

2011


331


BPC440

Figure 240: Consolidation of Investments

Note: The Proportional Method is also referred to as the Proportionate Method.

332


2011

BPC440


Key Terms •

•

•

• • • •

Purchase Method - Generally used if ownership is greater than 50%. This is used when the parent unit of a consolidation group exercises a dominating influence over an investee. Equity Method - Generally used when ownership is less than 50%. This is an accounting technique used for consolidating affiliates, as well as subsidiaries or joint ventures. Financial data of an equity unit is not taken into account in the consolidated financial statements. Therefore, you do not need to enter that data into the Consolidation system. Only changes in the stockholders’ equity of the company are taken into consideration; this affects only the investment value stated in the consolidated balance sheet. Proportional Method - Generally used if ownership is greater than 50%. In contrast to the purchase method, the proportional method of consolidation collects the items of a legal subsidiary’s balance sheet and income statement into the consolidated statements. This is proportional to the investor’s percentage of ownership in the investee, rather than at the full amount. This is why the Proportional Method does not book Minority Interest. Investor - The buyer Investee - The company being purchased. Direct Share - The % ownership between the investor and the investee. For example, C9 owns 90% of C3. Indirect Share - The % ownership between the higher level parent and the investee. For example, C9,s Indirect Share of C8 is 27%. (.9 x .3) Indirect Share is also referred to as Group share.

• •

Minority Interest - The % portion of the investee not owned by the parent. Goodwill - The difference between the purchase price and the book value of the investee’s equity.

Purchase Method Example In this section, you will learn the accounting entries for the Purchase Method. Note: The examples below are conceptual illustrations and may not reflect your exact accounting practice. When a subsidiary is first acquired, the purchase method eliminates the investment against the equity of the subsidiary with the difference going to goodwill. Minority interest is also recorded. After the subsidiary is first acquired, the parent and minority share of the subsidiary’s earnings is determined.

2011


333


BPC440

For example, if you own 80% of a subsidiary, you claim 80% of their annual net income while the minority share is 20%. Goodwill may also be amortized (for non-US companies only.) In the example below Co A - Company A acquired Co B - Company B for 50,000. The aggregated (Agg) amounts cannot be reported since they include values for both the parent and the subsidiary. Therefore, the values that are in common are eliminated to produce the Group results. Only 80% of the subsidiary is owned in this example so there was a premium paid which is booked as goodwill and minority interest is also booked for the 20%. Goodwill of 40,000 is based on the parent’s share of the subsidiary equity, which is 40,000 (.8 times 50,000) for which they paid 80,000.

Figure 241: COI Example - Purchase Method 80% @ 80,000

Equity Method Example In this section, you will learn the accounting entries for the Equity Method. In the example below, Entity C5000 purchased 30% of C5100 for 20,000. The net effect will be to debit Goodwill 5,000 and credit the investment account by 5,000. C5100 has equity of 50,000, of which, 15,000 belongs to C5000 and since they paid 20,000, there is 5,000 of Goodwill.

334


2011

BPC440


Figure 242: Equity Method Concept

Note: In general, the subsidiary’s cash and equity would not appear in the Investor’s books at all.

Proportional Method Example In this section, you will learn the accounting entries for the Proportional Method. In the example below, C3000 paid 80,000 for (.75 * 50,000) of C4000’s Equity. This is a premium of 42,500, which is goodwill. Here, .25 of C4000’s Cash is also eliminated. However, there is no minority interest for the proportional method.

Figure 243: Proportional Method Example

2011


335


BPC440

Project Implementation Ownership elimination is generally automated for complex scenarios that take considerable time during the close. The following factors should be considered before implementation. • • • • • •

Do you need to automate your Consolidation of Investment accounting? Are all of your subsidiaries wholly owned? What are the data requirements? Are there frequent acquisitions and divestitures? Are there intercompany dividends, loans, interest, and so on that need to be eliminated? Other

The Course investment Structure This is the example that you will follow in the class.

Figure 244: Course scenario: Investment Structure

336


2011

BPC440


Facilitated Discussion Review the key points of the Purchase Method.

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. Is Minority Interest booked in the Purchase Method?

2011


337


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss the concepts of Consolidation of Investments

338


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 328

Lesson: Using the Ownership Manager

Using the Ownership Manager Lesson Duration: 75 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to use the Ownership Manager.


Personalize the Ownership Manager Create an ownership hierarchy Copy Ownership data to a different category and time Execute Ownership calculations

You may want to demo the purchase consolidation before this lesson so students know how this data is used.

Business Example To perform group level elimination entries, you need to set up the Ownership Model and record the ownership data.

The Ownership Model The Ownership Model stores the ownership percentages and method assignments. The following dimensions are normally included. • • • • • •

Entity - the legal subsidiaries Group - the consolidation groups Category - the versions InterCompany - the trading partners or Investees Account - the ownership accounts Time - the month and year Note: The Ownership Model setting: Non Interco Member in Ownership must be assigned a member such as I_NONE.

2011


339


BPC440

The Ownership Model setting: Parent / Child Property Used for the Hierarchy of Groups contains the property: PARENT_GROUP. of the group type dimension. The values in the PARENT_GROUP. property will be used to form the ownership hierarchy for the Ownership Manager. In the Ownership Model’s account dimension, these are the required members: • • • • • • • • • • •

PGROUP: This is used to assign companies to groups METHOD: The consolidation method POWN: The percentage of ownership (how much they are owned by the group) PCON: The percentage of consolidation PCTRL: The percentage of control (how much they are controlled by the group) METHOD_SYS: This stores the consolidation methods generated by the system POWN_SYS: This stores the percentage of ownership generated by the system PCON_SYS: This stores the percentage of consolidation generated by the system PCTRL_SYS: This stores the percentage of control (how much they are controlled by the group) generated by the system POWND: This defines the percentage of direct ownership POWND_SYS: This stores the percentage of direct ownership generated by the system

The group dimension is used to store Consolidation Groups.

Figure 245: Group Dimension

340


2011

BPC440


Group Dimension Properties • • • •

Conso_Type is used to filter by group members in the Elimination and Adjustment Rule in the header field named Group Type Filter Currency_Type is used to identify whether a group member should be valued at the G (Group) currency or N (Local) currency. Datasrc_Level is used to control the recording of elimination entries to higher level groups Entity is used to identify the entity members that will be used for the group level elimination values. If this is filled with a valid entity member, and the Store_Entity property is set to Y, the currency translation results will also be copied into this Entity

• •

• •

•

Group_Currency contains the currency or currencies for each group Parent_Group is used to identify group members to be used in the Ownership Manager. This is specified in the Ownership Model setting: Parent/Child Property Used for the Hierarchy of Groups Stage_Only is used to control the storage of currency translation by group and base level members Store_Entity can be used to write elimination entries to different members. The results of currency translation can also be copied to the Entity ID in the Entity property above Store_Group_Curr if set to N, currency translation results will only be written to group members

The Ownership Manager In this section you will learn how to use the Ownership Manager. The Ownership Manager in the Consolidation Central module enables you to create and manage ownership-based hierarchies used for performing statutory consolidation. An ownership based hierarchy combines Group and Entity members, where entities can be assigned to groups by Category and Time. Groups are nodes and entities are base level members. You define ownership based hierarchies in the system to set up and report on entity hierarchies that cannot be managed by a dimensional hierarchy. Therefore, the parent child relationships below are not based on a dimensional hierarchy, it is a hierarchical view of the parent child data in the Ownership InfoCube.

2011


341


BPC440

Key Features of the Ownership Manager New web based user interface with Personalization Replaces the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor Ownership calculations are run from the Ownership Manager Graphical ownership relationships based on transaction data There are 3 security tasks: View Ownership Manager, Edit Ownership Manager, Run Ownership Calculations Data is stored by category and period You can copy from one period / category to another Methods and percentages can be easily entered

• • • • • • • •

Note: Ownership based hierarchies are only available in consolidation type models. The Ownership Manager can be found in Consolidation Central. In the example below, it is in display mode.

Figure 246: The Ownership Manager in Display Mode

Ownership Manager Navigation in Display Mode

342

Field

Definition

Model

Select the Ownership Model

Context Menu

The Category, Time, and Group selections

Edit

Takes you into change mode


2011

BPC440


Column Selector (located under Edit)

Select which columns to display. All accounts in the ownership account dimension are available.

Show Description

If checked, the descriptions of the group members are displayed

View

Choose either List or Hierarchy

No. of Decimal Places

Select 0 to 5

To change ownership data, go into Edit mode. In the example below, C9000 is the holding company and is therefore assigned method 90. C1000 is the investee using the purchase method and is therefore assigned method 86. C9000 is included 100% in G_CG1 while C1000’s ownership % is 80%. Note: When Edit is selected, an additional tab is created.

Figure 247: The Ownership Manager in Edit Mode

Below you can see what the data looks like in the InfoCube. Note: The budget category was used since this was test data.

2011


343


BPC440

Figure 248: Ownership Data

Data can be populated in the Ownership Model several ways: Ownership Manager Data import Input Schedule

• • •

Below you can see the unique options in Edit mode. Ownership Manager Navigation in Edit Mode Field

Definition

Add

Add a member to a group

Remove

Remove a member from a group

Union and Pin

Cut and Paste a base level member

Up and Down arrows

Move a base level member up or down in the hierarchy

More (>>) → Show Description

To Show Description of all members

Update Ownership If chosen will inherit the method assignment from a lower Upwards level to a higher level group

344

Show Empty

Suppresses rows with no % data

Save

Save any new method assignment or percentage

Copy To

Copy ownership data to another Category and Year.Month

Calculate

Calculates ownership data


2011

BPC440


How to Set Up Ownership Data 334

1.

Open the Ownership Manager from Consolidation Central

2.

Select your Ownership Model

3.

Set your context to the appropriate category, time, and group members

4.

Use the Column Selector to select the columns below Consolidation Method - Current Percent Consolidation - Current Percent Ownership - Current

5.

Choose Edit

6.

Select your columns again if necessary

7.

Choose a group member and click Add → Select one or more Entities → OK. Repeat this process to build the hierarchy. Below you can see an example:

Figure 249: Hierarchy Structure


2011


345


8.

BPC440

Input the methods and % Ownership and % Consolidation Hint: Double-click at the intersection of an Entity and the Method to select from a dropdown box.

9.

Choose Save Your ownership data is now stored in the Ownership InfoCube

Running the Ownership Calculation The ownership calculations specify a parent entity’s ownership interest in its subsidiaries, and the consolidation rates and methods to be applied.

Figure 250: Calculate Ownership

Note: Choose either Calculate ultimate % Ownership and Control through or Calculate method or % consolidation or both based on previous calculation.

346


2011

BPC440


Calculate Ownership Options •

Calculate ultimate % Ownership and Control through - Calculates the Group’s percentage of ownership (POWN) and control (PCON) of each entity. Choose one of the following two methods: Direct share method: The Direct percentage of ownership that a parent entity holds in a subsidiary. – Group share method: The Group percentage of ownership that a parent entity holds in a subsidiary. Calculate method or % consolidation or both based on previous calculation - Use the previously calculated Ultimate Ownership % to derive the method or percentage of consolidation. Update Method - Select to update the ownership method Update % Consolidation - Select to update the % Consolidation Overwrite current ownership values with calculated values - Select to update the % Ownership and Consolidation –

•

• • •

2011


347


BPC440

How to Calculate Ownership Data 337

1.

Input Percent Control and Percent Ownership data into the Ownership Model. In the example below, you can see the web input form that was used. The Holding company (C9000) has 55 Percent Control over Germany and Germany(C1000) has 40 Percent Control over UK(C2000). The Holding company (C9000) has 70 Percent Ownership over Germany and Germany has 60 Percent Ownership over UK. Note: Percent Control is the description of the POWN account and Percent Ownership is the description of the POWN account. Note: The data is recorded against the Plan category since it is a test. An Excel input schedule could be used to enter the data as well.

Figure 251: Test Data

2.

Enter the Methods data as you see below for Share Range and Applicable Percent.


348


2011

BPC440


Figure 252: Methods

Ownership calculations can now be executed and the system will propose which method to use based on Percent Control for example. Note: 0.75<,<=1.00 is interpreted as Greater than .75 but less than or equal to 1.00. 3.

Access the Ownership Manger in edit mode.

Figure 253: Edit Mode - Initially

4.

Add the members as shown below to the G_CG1 group. Select the Consolidation Methods as shown below and save the data.


2011


349


BPC440

Figure 254: Ownership Structure

5.

Calculate the Percent Control - Generated and Percent Ownership Generated values using the Direct Share Method.

Figure 255: Calculate Direct Share

This effectively copies the data entered in step one to the Percent Control Generated and Percent Ownership - Generated ownership accounts. Continued on next page

350


2011

BPC440


6.

Calculate the Percent Control - Generated and Percent Ownership Generated values using the Group Share Method.

Figure 256: Calculate Group Share

The Group Share of C2000 is 22% Percent Control since C1000 only has 55% control (.55 x .40 = .22). The Group Share of C2000 is 42% Percent Control since C1000 only has 70% ownership (.70 x .60 = .42). 7.

Overwrite the Percent Ownership - Current using the Group Share Method.


2011


351


BPC440

Figure 257: Calculate Group Share and Overwrite POWN

The Percent Ownership - Current value is updated to 42% for C2000. 8.

Update the Method, Percent Consolidation, and Percent Ownership values using the Group Share Method.


352


2011

BPC440


Figure 258: Calculate Group Share and Update Method, PCON, and POWN

The Method for C1000 is updated to Proportional since its Percent Control falls between the range of .25 to .75 specified in the Methods above. The Method for C2000 is updated to Equity since its Percent Control falls between the range of .00 to .25 specified in the Methods above. The Percent Control for C1000 is updated to .75 since its Percent Control falls between the range of .25 to .75 specified in the Methods above. The Percent Control for C2000 is updated to .25 since its Percent Control falls between the range of .00 to .25 specified in the Methods above. 9.

Update the methods and percentages based on the Direct Share Method


2011


353


BPC440

Figure 259: Calculate Direct Share and Update Method, PCON, and POWN

The Method for C2000 is updated to Proportional since its Percent Control falls between the range of .25 to .75 specified in the Methods above. The Percent Control for C2000 is updated to .75 since its Percent Control falls between the range of .25 to .75 specified in the Methods above. 10. Calculate group shares but do not update any other data.


354


2011

BPC440


Figure 260: Calculate Group Share

Now you can test updating methods and percentages based on previous calculations. 11. Update methods and percentages based on previous calculations.


2011


355


BPC440

Figure 261: Update Method, PCON, and POWN Based on Previous Calculation

Methods and percentages were updated based on the previous calculation.

Copying Ownership Data When you are in Edit mode in the Ownership Manager, you can copy data to different a category and year.month. This will help to minimize manual data entry.

356


2011

BPC440


Figure 262: Copy Ownership Data

One Entity With Multiple Parents Of course, it is common for one subsidiary to have multiple parents. In the example below, C5100 is owned by C3000 and well as by C5000 (not shown).

Figure 263: Revised G_CG3 With 30% of C5100

The Global Definition Methods You set up Global Definitions business rules at the environment level. Once the Methods and Method - Based Multipliers are defined, they can be used in the Consolidation type model. There are two business rule tables at the Environment level in Global Definitions: • •

2011

Methods - containing method codes Method - Based Multipliers - containing members selection and formulas


357


BPC440

You can use the delivered Method Codes or create your own. Method Codes are logical identifiers that you will attach to Entities and formulas. They do not have any inherent programming logic associated with them. When the consolidation program is executed, it reads the dimension properties, the Method Codes, the Method - Based Multipliers, the %s in the Ownership Model, and the Elimination and Adjustment business rule tables to perform calculations.

Figure 264: Ownership Method Codes

Methods Table Field

Definition

Method Code

The value must be an integer between 1 and 98. 99 is a reserved value and means any method. (It is a wildcard)

Description

The description for the method such as Purchase, Equity, Proportional

Method Type

Share Range

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

E Equity P Proportional G Global (Purchase method) L Leaving (End of Year) D Leaving (End of Prior Year) H Holding (Parent)

The percentage range for the given method. Example: If the percentage share range for E- Equity is .2 to .5 then the Ownership Calculation will propose the Equity Method when an Entity has a value between .2 and .5.

Applicable Percent This field holds the value that could be copied to the Consolidation consolidation percent (PCON). Note: The method type New is not used.

358


2011

BPC440

349


Exercise 12: Create Investment Data in the Ownership Manager Exercise Duration: 55 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create an investment structure using the Ownership Manager. • Copy and modify the investment data.

Business Example Your company has many legal subsidiaries and they are not all 100% owned, so the manual close takes a long time. You are interested in seeing how easy it is to perform this automatically. The first step is to set up your data in the Ownership model.

Task 1: Create the methods 1.

Open the Method table in the Administration Web client.

2.

Create new method codes as shown below. Note: As you can see, you can use your own method codes. The consolidation method and percentage of consolidation (PCON) can be automatically defined according to the Share Range and Applicable Percent Consolidation factor fields. For example, if you own 20% of a company’s shares, the system could propose the Equity method code and Percent Consolidation of 25, since the Share Range is 0.0 < ,<=0.25.


2011


359


BPC440

Figure 265: Ownership Methods

Note: In Applicable Percent Consolidation, you can use integers or the PCTRL account.

Task 2: Personalize your view in the Ownership Manager. 1.

Open the Ownership Manager.

2.

Set your context as shown below for the Ownership model. Note: Either the ID or the description will appear. Dimension


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG1 - Corporate

3.

Set your view to hierarchy with zero decimals.

4.

Restrict the columns to show only the following three ownership accounts.


360


2011

BPC440


Consolidation Method - Current Percent Consolidation - Current Percent Ownership - Current Note: These are the descriptions of the ownership accounts. Member

Description

METHOD

Consolidation Method - Current

PCON

Percent Consolidation - Current

POWN

Percent Ownership - Current

Task 3: Maintain your investment data in the Ownership Manager. 1.

In edit mode, restrict your columns to only those shown below.

Figure 266: Columns in Edit Mode

2.

Build the parent child relationships as shown below.


2011


361


BPC440

Figure 267: Parent Child Relationship (your order may vary)

3.

Assign the methods and record the percentages for the CG2 group as shown below.

Figure 268: CG2

4.



362


2011

BPC440


Figure 269: CG3

5.


Figure 270: CG4

6.



2011


363


BPC440

Figure 271: CG1

7.

View your data in the Ownership Manager initial view.

Task 4: Copy Ownership data

364

1.

Use the copy feature to create actual data in 2012.01.

2.

Change your context to 2012.01.

3.

Add C5100 to the bottom of the G_CG3 group.

4.

Assign the Equity method to C5100 in G_CG3 using 30 for both percentage accounts.


2011

BPC440


Solution 12: Create Investment Data in the Ownership Manager Task 1: Create the methods 1.

2.

Open the Method table in the Administration Web client. a)


b)


c)

Under Global Definitions, choose Methods.

Create new method codes as shown below. Note: As you can see, you can use your own method codes. The consolidation method and percentage of consolidation (PCON) can be automatically defined according to the Share Range and Applicable Percent Consolidation factor fields. For example, if you own 20% of a company’s shares, the system could propose the Equity method code and Percent Consolidation of 25, since the Share Range is 0.0 < ,<=0.25.

Figure 272: Ownership Methods

Note: In Applicable Percent Consolidation, you can use integers or the PCTRL account. a)



2011


365


BPC440

Task 2: Personalize your view in the Ownership Manager. 1.

Open the Ownership Manager. a)

2.

On the Home tab, choose Consolidation Central → Ownership Manager.

Set your context as shown below for the Ownership model. Note: Either the ID or the description will appear.

3.

4.

Dimension


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG1 - Corporate

a)

Next to Model, choose Ownership.

b)

Choose the C_Category member and then choose ACTUAL → OK.

c)

Select the Time and Consgroup members as well.

Set your view to hierarchy with zero decimals. a)

Next to View, choose Hierarchy.

b)

Next to No. of Decimal Places, choose 0.

Restrict the columns to show only the following three ownership accounts.


366


2011

BPC440


Consolidation Method - Current Percent Consolidation - Current Percent Ownership - Current Note: These are the descriptions of the ownership accounts.

a)

Member

Description

METHOD

Consolidation Method - Current

PCON

Percent Consolidation - Current

POWN

Percent Ownership - Current

Use the Column Selector to select the three columns as shown below.

Figure 273: Columns in the Ownership Manager

b)

To adopt your selections, left click outside the dialog box.

Task 3: Maintain your investment data in the Ownership Manager. 1.

In edit mode, restrict your columns to only those shown below.


2011


367


BPC440

Figure 274: Columns in Edit Mode

a)

Choose Edit and select the following context members: Dimension


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG1 - Corporate

This generates a tab called Edit Ownership (Actual, 2011.12, G_CG1).

2.

b)

Choose the Column Selector.

c)

Deselect all but three as shown above.

Build the parent child relationships as shown below.


368


2011

BPC440



2011


369


BPC440

Figure 275: Parent Child Relationship (your order may vary)

a)

Click G_CG2 and choose Add. The Member Selector dialog appears.

b)

Select C1000 Germany and C2000 UK and choose OK. C1000 and C2000 are added to the G_CG2 group.

c)


d)

Select C3000 US and C4000 Canada and choose OK. C3000 and C4000 are added to the G_CG3 group.

e)


f)

Select C5000 Japan and C51000 Australia and choose OK. C5000 and C5100 are added to the G_CG4 group.

g)


h)

Select C9000 Holding and choose OK. C9000 is added to the G_CG1 group.

i)

Next to Add, choose More (>>). Deselect Show Description. Hint: To move an entity up or down, select it and use the up or down arrow (to the right of the Add button).

3.



370


2011

BPC440


Figure 276: CG2

a)

Highlight the G_CG2 group.

b)

Double-click in the intersection of Entity C1000 and Consolidation Method Current. A dropdown list appears.

c)

From the dropdown list, select 90 as shown above.

d)

Double-click in the intersection of Entity C2000 and Consolidation Method Current.

e)


f)

To record the percentage data, type in the values as shown above.

g)

Choose Save. You have recorded the method assignments and %s in the Ownership model for G_CG2.

4.



2011


371


BPC440

Figure 277: CG3

a)


b)


c)


d)


e)


f)


g)


5.



372


2011

BPC440


Figure 278: CG4

a)


b)


c)


d)


e)


f)


g)


6.



2011


373


BPC440

Figure 279: CG1

a)


b)

Double-click in the intersection of Entity C9000 and Consolidation Method Current. A dropdown list appears.

c)


d)

Record the Consolidation Method Current for the remaining entities as shown above.

e)

Enter the %s manually as shown above.

f)



374


2011

BPC440


7.

View your data in the Ownership Manager initial view. a)

On the Home tab, choose Consolidation Central → Ownership Manager.

Figure 280: Ownership Manager from Consolidation Central


2011


375


BPC440

Task 4: Copy Ownership data 1.

Use the copy feature to create actual data in 2012.01. a)

Go to the Edit Ownership (Actual, 2011.12, G_CG1) tab.

b)

Choose Copy to and make your selections as shown below:.

Figure 281: Copy Ownership Data

c)

Choose OK. Data is created in the Ownership InfoCube.

2.

Change your context to 2012.01. a)

3.

Select 2012.01 from the dropdown list.

Add C5100 to the bottom of the G_CG3 group. a)

Choose G_CG3 → Add. Select Australia and choose OK.

b)

Choose C5100 and click the down arrow twice. C5100 should now be located below C4000.


376


2011

BPC440


4.

Assign the Equity method to C5100 in G_CG3 using 30 for both percentage accounts. a)

Enter your data as shown below.

Figure 282: Revised G_CG3

b)

Choose Save. You have copied Dec 2011 data to Jan 2012 and added C5100 to G_CG3.

2011


377


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Personalize the Ownership Manager • Create an ownership hierarchy • Copy Ownership data to a different category and time • Execute Ownership calculations

378


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 369

Lesson: Eliminating Ownership - Purchase Method

Eliminating Ownership - Purchase Method Lesson Duration: 55 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn the business reasons and setup for ownership elimination. You will see an example of how it works as well as all of the components in detail.


Describe what the Business Rules do Configure business rules for a Purchase method scenario Identify the key dimensional properties Explain the results of the elimination job

BPC generates many entries for Elims. Be very careful how you present this to customers. Focus on the reports in the labs that are run for elimination datasrcs and the G_CG# groups. You may want to demo this elimination before the ownership lesson so they know how the ownership data will be used. The accounting can become complex here, so be careful. The intent is not to make CPAs out of the students but to teach them where to go in configuration to generate the desired outcome. The configuration we do in class is not necessarily how customers need to use the system for their interpretation of their accounting standards.

Business Example Your corporation has many legal subsidiaries and not all of them are wholly owned. There are a fair number of acquisitions and divestitures during the year as well and that has helped to create a very long manual process to eliminate ownership and book minority interest during closes. Consequently, you are looking into automating that process as much as possible.

How Does It Work? This is the data set we will be using for this example. Company C1000 has acquired 80% of C2000 for 80,000. They both belong to the G_CG2 group.

2011


379


BPC440

Data for the Example Parent

Entity

Method POWN

G_CG2

C1000

90

1.00

G_CG2

C2000

86

.80

12311000 Investment

25110000 Treasury Stock

80,000 100,000

The following are the processing steps to eliminate the investment when consolidation is executed for G_CG2. These comments are associated with the diagram below. 1. 2.

The Source Account - 12311000 value of 80,000 is read into memory for C1000. For the associated Destination All Account - 12311000 and Multiplier RULE060 the percentage of 100% (1 = 100%) is read from the Method-Based Multipliers table for C1000 since it is assigned Method Code 90. Note: Destination All Accounts post with the opposite sign.

3.

For the associated Rule ID - ELCOI1 the Destination Data Source - AJ_COI1 is used to post a 80,000 with the opposite sign.

Figure 283: Investment Elimination

380


2011

BPC440


These are the processing steps to eliminate the equity when consolidation is executed for G_CG2. 1. 2.

The Source Account - 25110000 value of 100,000 is read into memory for C2000 For the associated Destination All Account - 25110000 and Multiplier RULE010 the percentage of 100% is read from the Method-Based Multipliers table for C2000 since it is assigned Method Code 86. Note: Destination All Accounts post with the opposite sign.

3.

For the associated Rule ID - ELCOI2 the Destination Data Source - AJ_COI2 is used to post a 100,000 with the same sign.

Figure 284: The Equity Elimination (Purchase Method)

These are the processing steps to calculate minority Interest when consolidation is executed for G_CG2. 1. 2.

3.

2011

The Source Account - 25110000 value of 100,000 is read into memory for C2000 For the associated Destination Minority Account - 24111000 and Multiplier - RULE010 the percentage of 1.00 minus .80 (POWN) is read from the Method-Based Multipliers table for C2000 since it is assigned Method Code 86. For the associated Rule ID - ELCOI3 the Destination Data Source - AJ_COI3 is used to post a value 20,000 with the same sign.


381


BPC440

Figure 285: Minority Calculation

The Purchase Elimination Results In summary, this is what happened: • • •

The Investment of 80,000 was eliminated. The Equity of the subsidiary was eliminated. The Minority Interest of 20,000 was booked.

Figure 286: CG2 Consolidation Result

382


2011

BPC440


The Key Steps to Set up Ownership Elimination • • • • • • • •

Set up the Dimension members and properties Create the required Models – Consolidation, Ownership, and Rate Configure the Methods and Method - Based Multipliers Business Rules for the Environment Configure the Eliminations and Adjustments business rules for the Consolidation Model Configure the Currency Translation business rules for the Consolidation Model Input and/or calculate the Methods and Percentages into the Ownership Model Import the Rate and the Legal Application data Run consolidation, review the results

Set up the Dimension members and properties Legal Model Dimensions - Focus on Consolidation Dimension Type

Consolidation Related Notes

Account

The supporting properties are: • •

Category

Dimlist - this groups accounts for business rule selections. TypeElim - this groups accounts for business rule selections.

The supporting properties are: Own_Category , Own_Period and Own_Year - can be used for simulations. You need to use the same dimension in the Ownership and Rate Models. •

DataSource

The supporting properties are: • •

Entity

Datasrc_Type whose values are I – Input, M – Manual Adjustment, A – Eliminations and Adjustments IS_Consol - use a value of Y to include it in the consolidation run.

The supporting property is: • Intco - links the Entity to the intercompany member. You need to use the same dimension in the Ownership Model.

2011


383


Group

BPC440

The supporting property is: • Entity - where to save the consolidated results The required member is G_NONE , which is for third party data. You need to use the same dimension in the Ownership Model.

InterCompany The supporting property is: Entity - links the intercompany member to the Entity member. This dimension must also be used in the Ownership Model. •

Time

The supporting properties are: • Year - with values like 2011, 2012 • Period - with values like JUN, JUL • TimeID - with values like 201206, 201207 • Monthnum - with values like 6, 7 You need to use the same dimension in the Ownership and Rate Models.

The Method - Based Multipliers Business Rule The Method - Based Multipliers business rule does the following: • •

Identifies the percentage to use Selects the Entities and intercompany members based on their assigned Method Codes

The rule shown below will do the following: •

100% of the source values (multiplied by -1) will be written into the ALL accounts specified in the Eliminations and Adjustments Business Rule Note: The All Formula reverses the sign so that All of the investment is eliminated for example.

• • •

384

Select entities with a Method Code assignment of 86 and any (99) other intercompany member The POWN % of the source values will be written to the group accounts specified in the Eliminations and Adjustments Business Rule The source value will be multiplied by 1 minus .80 and written to the minority account specified in the Eliminations and Adjustments Business Rule.


2011

BPC440


Figure 287: Rule 10

Note: The Rule Type is blank (not shown). Method - Based Multipliers Business Rule Fields

2011

Field

Definition

Rule ID

Logical ID

Description

Description of the rule

Type

Leave blank except for Equity, Proportional, Leaving (in current month), and Disposed (last month of last year)

Entity Method

This is used to select Entities via their assigned Method Code You can use one Method Code or multiple values separated by commas

Intco Method

This is used to select intercompany members via their assigned Method Code Use one Method Code or multiple values separated by commas or 99 to select intercompany members with any Method Code

All Formula

The percentage (or formula) to apply to the Destination All account in the Eliminations and Adjustments table

Group Formula

The percentage (or formula) to apply to the Group account in the Eliminations and Adjustments table

Minority Formula

The percentage (or formula) to apply to the Destination Minority account in the Eliminations and Adjustments table

Remark

Text description for this rule


385


BPC440

The Elimination and Adjustments Business Rule

Figure 288: Elimination Rule - General

Eliminations and Adjustments General Business Rule Fields

386

Field

Definition

ID

Logical ID

Description

Description of the ID

Source Data Source

Select the source Datasource member to include


Select the target Datasource

Group Type Filter

Select the target Group dimension members based on their Conso_Type property value

Entity Property Filter

Select Entities to include based on any property

Adjustment Type

Leave blank except for Equity, Proportional, and Leaving

Adjustment Level

Used to order the sequence of execution of the rule

Other Dimensions Filter

Select the source data region for other dimensions

Force Destination Members

Used to hard code target members in additional data records

Ownership Filter

Used to restrict the rule to members that existed in the prior year for example. To do that enter PPCON <> 0


2011

BPC440


Figure 289: Elimination Rule - Details

Eliminations and Adjustments Detail Business Rule Fields

2011

Field

Definition

Source Account

Select accounts to include. Use a base or parent member, or a TYPEELIM or DIMLIST property value

Source Flow

Select flow members to include. Use a base or parent member, or a TYPEELIM or DIMLIST property value

Reverse Sign

If Y the value is reversed, otherwise leave blank

Destination All Account

Target account for the All Formula percentage in the Method - Based Multiplier table. Use a base or parent member, or a TYPEELIM or DIMLIST property value

Destination Group Account

Target account for the Group Formula percentage in the Method - Based Multiplier table. A base or parent Account, a TYPEELIM or DIMLIST property value in the account dimension

Destination Minority Account

Target account for Minority Formula percentage in the Method - Based Multiplier table. A base or parent Account, a TYPEELIM or DIMLIST property value in the account dimension


387


388

BPC440

Destination Equity Account

Target account for the All Formula percentage in the Method - Based Multiplier table for the Equity Method. A base or parent Account, a TYPEELIM or DIMLIST property value in the account dimension

Destination Flow

Target base level member

Multiplier

The Rule ID from the Method - Based Multiplier table

Force Closing

If Y it generates an extra record on the closing flow, otherwise leave blank

Swap Entity Intco

If Y it will swap the member of the Entity dimension with the intercompany member

Force Intco Member

To hard code the target intercompany member instead of using the source

Periodic Calc

Can be used in a YTD Model when the ownership percentage should be applied on the periodic values


2011

BPC440


379

How to Configure the Purchase Method Business Rules 1.

Goto Administration → Rules → Business Rules

2.

In Methods, add a Method Code for Method Type: G - Global (86) and Method Type: H - Holding (90)

3.

In Method - Based Multipliers add a Multiplier ID that will select Entities with Method Type: H - Holding (90) and All Formula of 1

4.

In Method - Based Multipliers add a Multiplier ID that will select Entities with Method Type: G - Global (86) and an All Formula of POWN and Minority Formula of 1- POWN

5.

In Eliminations and Adjustments add a new rule with: • • •

6.

Source Account - use your Investment Account Destination Account - use your Investment Account Multiplier - 90

In Eliminations and Adjustments add a new rule with: • • •

Source Account - use your Equity Account Destination Account - use your Equity Account Multiplier - 86

7.

Run Consolidate in the Consolidation Monitor

8.

Review the results in the Excel Interface for the EPM add-in

The Purchase Method Run From the Consolidation Monitor In this section you will learn how the system generates the required entries. To execute consolidation, highlight a group and choose Consolidate. Note: Currency translation does not have to be run before consolidation. If currency translation has not been run, the system will execute it first automatically and then will run consolidation.

2011


389


BPC440

Figure 290: Consolidation Monitor - Before Running any Tasks

There are two statuses for Translation and Consolidation: • •

To be executed Done Note: A parent’s status will be To be executed if any of its children have that status. A parent’s status will be Done if all of its children have that status. Note: If a group has an entity with the To be executed status and another with the Done status, both will be processed when the group is run with Full Consolidation Execution Mode. If a group has an entity with the To be executed status and another with the Done status, only the entity with the status To be executed will be processed when the group is run with Incremental Consolidation Execution Mode.

When you choose Consolidate, make your selections as you see below and click OK.

390


2011

BPC440


Figure 291: Run Consolidate

Figure 292: Status After Execution

Consolidation Logic If you need to run consolidation from the Data Manager you will need to add the two steps below to your project plan for the Consolidation Model • •

Add the Consolidation script logic file Add the Consolidation Data Manager package

Below you can see the logic for consolidation. Note: In this example, currency is translated into the group members first, and then consolidation runs.

2011


391


BPC440

Figure 293: Consolidation Logic

Consolidation Package When the consolidation data manage package is run , it generates the same data as running consolidation from the Consolidation Monitor. Below you can see the default selections for the package, and a sample Formula Log.

392


2011

BPC440


Figure 294: Data Manager Consolidation Package and Log

2011


393


394


BPC440

2011

BPC440

385


Exercise 13: Configure Business Rules for the Purchase Method Exercise Duration: 55 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure the business rules to do ownership elimination. • Describe the entries generated by the system.

Business Example Your company or your client needs to use the Purchase method for a few subsidiaries that are not 100% owned. This will speed up the closing process.

Task 1: Create your multipliers and activate Eliminations and Adjustments for your Legal model. 1.

Open the Method-Based Multipliers table in the Administration Web client. Note: Method-based multipliers have two roles: 1. 2.

2.

They contain the formulas or multipliers They are used to select entity and intercompany members.

Create the RULE 10 Method-Based Multiplier Rule as shown below.

Figure 295: Rule 10

3.



2011


395


BPC440

Figure 296: Rule 60

4.

Activate Eliminations and Adjustments for your Legal model

Task 2: Create Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs. 1.

Create your ELCOI1 rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below. Note: ELCOI stands for Elimination for Consolidation of Investments.

Figure 297: ELCOI1 General

2.

Fill in the detail data as shown below.


396


2011

BPC440


Figure 298: ELCOI1 Details

3.

Create your ELCOI2 rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below.


4.



2011


397


BPC440


5.



6.



398


2011

BPC440



Task 3: Run Currency Translation and Consolidation from the Consolidation Monitor. 1.

Access the Consolidation Monitor for your Legal model.

2.

Set your context as shown below: Note: Make sure you select every member shown below from the dropdown list the first time in the Consolidation Monitor.

3.

Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG1 - Corporate

Execute Consolidation for Actual, 2011.12, and G_CG2.

Task 4: Run a report to see the results. 1.

Review the results in the Excel interface of the EPM add-in.

2.

Set your EPM context as shown below. Continued on next page

2011


399


400

BPC440

Dimension


Company

This can be any value

Consgroup

G_CG2 - Europe

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco

Total - Total

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

3.

View your results in the BPC440 Cons CG2 report.

4.

Save the report.


2011

BPC440


Solution 13: Configure Business Rules for the Purchase Method Task 1: Create your multipliers and activate Eliminations and Adjustments for your Legal model. 1.

Open the Method-Based Multipliers table in the Administration Web client. Note: Method-based multipliers have two roles: 1. 2.

2.

They contain the formulas or multipliers They are used to select entity and intercompany members.

a)

From the Home tab on the Start Page, select Planning and Consolidation Administration.

b)


c)

Under Global Definitions, choose Method-Based Multipliers.



2011


401


BPC440

Figure 303: Rule 10

a)

Under Method-Based Multipliers, choose New.

b)

Enter your data as shown above. As a result: •

• •

•

This rule will be used to select entities with method code assignments of 86 and intercompany members with any (99) method code. 100% (1) of the source value will be written to the ALL account specified in the eliminations and adjustments business rule. The POWN % of the source value will be written to the Group account specified in the eliminations and adjustments business rule. The 1-POWN % of the source value will be written to the Minority account specified in the eliminations and adjustments business rule. Note: The ALL formula will reverse the sign of the source values while the Group and Minority formulas will not.

c) 3.




402


2011

BPC440


Figure 304: Rule 60

a)


b)

Enter your data as shown above. As a result: •

• •

•

This rule will be used to select entities with method code assignments of 90 and intercompany members with any (99) method code. 100% (1) of the source value will be written to the ALL account specified in the eliminations and adjustments business rule. The POWN % of the source value will be written to the Group account specified in the eliminations and adjustments business rule. The 1-POWN % of the source value will be written to the Minority account specified in the eliminations and adjustments business rule. Note: The ALL formula will reverse the sign of the source values while the Group and Minority formulas will not.

c) 4.

Choose Save → Close → Return to Business Rules.

Activate Eliminations and Adjustments for your Legal model a)

Highlight the row for Legal and choose Add / Remove Rule Types.

b)

Select Eliminations and Adjustments and choose OK. The Eliminations and Adjustments table is now available for use.


2011


403


BPC440

Task 2: Create Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs. 1.

Create your ELCOI1 rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below. Note: ELCOI stands for Elimination for Consolidation of Investments.


a)

Under Currency Translation, choose Eliminations and Adjustments.

b)

Under Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs: LEGAL, choose New.

c)

Enter the general data as shown above. When ELCOI1 is triggered, the destination data source AJ_COI1 will be used.

2.



404


2011

BPC440



a)

Choose the Details tab.

b)

Make your selections as shown above.

c)

Choose Save → Close. The inverse value in the Source Account - 12311000 will be written to the Destination All Account - 12311000 based on RULE060 (Entity = Method Code - 90 and All Formula: 100%).

3.



2011


405


BPC440


a)

Choose New and enter the general data as shown above. When ELCOI2 is triggered, the Destination Data Source - AJ_COI2 will be used.

4.



406


2011

BPC440



a)


b)


c)

Choose Save → Close. The value in the Source Account - 25110000 will be written to the Destination All Account -25110000 based on Rule010 (Entity = Method Code - 86 and Group Formula: 100%).

5.



2011


407


BPC440


a)

Choose New and enter the general data as shown above. When ELCOI3 is triggered, the Destination Data Source - AJ_COI3 will be used.

6.



408


2011

BPC440



a)


b)


c)

Choose Save → Close. The value in the Source Account - 25110000 will be written to the Destination Minority Account - 24111000 based on Rule010 (Entity = Method Code - 86 and Minority Formula: 1 minus POWN).

Task 3: Run Currency Translation and Consolidation from the Consolidation Monitor. 1.

2.

Access the Consolidation Monitor for your Legal model. a)

From the Home tab, choose Consolidation Central → Consolidation Monitor.

b)

Next to Model, select Legal from the dropdown list.

Set your context as shown below: Note: Make sure you select every member shown below from the dropdown list the first time in the Consolidation Monitor.


2011


409


BPC440

Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG1 - Corporate

a)

Left click the context members to access the dropdown list and make your selections as shown above.

b)

Choose the More icon >> and select the Hierarchy view.

c)

Highlight row G_CG2.

Figure 311: Consolidation Monitor - Before Running Any Tasks


410


2011

BPC440


3.

Execute Consolidation for Actual, 2011.12, and G_CG2. a)

b)

With G_CG2 highlighted, choose Consolidate and make your selections as shown below. Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG2 - Europe

Execution Mode

Full Consolidation

Choose OK. The process is running.

c)

Choose Close.

d)

You should have a status of Done for the members below for both Currency Translation and Consolidation.



Review the results in the Excel interface of the EPM add-in. a)

On the Web client Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager appears.

2.

b)

Select Legal - BPC440_##.

c)

Choose OK.

d)

Choose the EPM tab.

Set your EPM context as shown below.


2011


411


Dimension


Company


Consgroup

G_CG2 - Europe

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco

Total - Total

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a) 3.

BPC440


View your results in the BPC440 Cons CG2 report. a)

On the upper left, choose Office → Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Cons CG2→ Open.

b)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 313: CG2 Consolidation Result

100% of the investment is eliminated, 100% of the equity on the subsidiary is eliminated, and the minority interest (20%) is booked. 4.

412

Save the report. a)


b)


c)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 Cons CG2.

d)

Choose Save.


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe what the Business Rules do • Configure business rules for a Purchase method scenario • Identify the key dimensional properties • Explain the results of the elimination job

2011


413


Lesson: 404

BPC440

Eliminating Ownership - Equity and Proportional Methods Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to configure ownership elimination in an Equity and Proportional scenario.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •

Configure business rules for an Equity and Proportional method

These methods are global in nature, so they do not require account assignments. That is the primary concept to cover in this lesson.

Business Example Some of your subsidiaries are less than 50% owned and so you need to use the Equity method. You are also interested in the Proportional method.

The Course investment Structure This is the investment structure you are working with.

414


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Eliminating Ownership - Equity and Proportional Methods

Figure 314: Investment Structure - Course Example

Equity Method Business Rules In this section you will learn how to configure the business rules for the Equity Method. In Rule 200 below, you can see an example of a Method - Based Multiplier rule used to select Entities with Entity Method - 30. The E - Equity Type is a global type rule in that it will eliminate balance sheet values automatically without any detailed account assignments in the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs.

2011


415


BPC440

Figure 315: Method Based Multiplier - For Equity

Shown below is the associated Elimination and Adjustment business rule. When ELEQY is triggered, the Destination Data Source AJ_EQUIMETH will be used. Since this is a Global scenario, select the E - Equity Adjustment Type. Note: The Equity Adjustment Type does not require any account assignments in the Details tab.

Figure 316: General

Caution: Not all business rules used to create the entries below are shown above.

416


2011

BPC440


The Equity Method Results The Equity method is an accounting technique used for consolidating affiliates, as well as subsidiaries or joint ventures that are not consolidated using the purchase or proportional methods. Only changes in the stockholders equity of the investee affect the investment value stated in the consolidated balance sheet. In the example below, C5000 purchased 30% of C5100 for 20,000. The net effect will be to debit Goodwill 5,000 and credit the investment account by 5,000. C5100 has equity of 50,000, of which, 15,000 belongs to C5000 and since they paid 20,000, there is 5,000 of Goodwill. C5100’s cash and equity will also be cleared. A credit of (65,000) for cash. (AJ_EQMETH) A credit of (26,000) for the investment. AJ_COI3) A debit of 19,500 for the investment, therefore a net credit of 6,500. (AJ_COI2) A credit of (19,500) into the Goodwill account. (AJ_COI2) A debit of 26,000 into the Goodwill account, therefore a net debit of 6,500. (AJ_COI1) A debit of (65,000) into the subsidiary equity account to clear it out. (AJ_EQMETH)

Figure 317: Equity Elimination Results

Proportional Business Rules In contrast to the purchase method, the Proportional method collects the items of a unit’s balance sheet and income statement into the consolidated statements. This is proportional to the investor’s percentage of ownership in the investee rather than at the full amount. In this section you will see how the system generates the required entries. The P - (Proportionate) Type is a global type rule in that it will eliminate balance sheet values automatically without any detailed account assignments in the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs. Below you can see Entities with the 70 method will be eliminated with 1-POWN for the Destination All Accounts.

2011


417


BPC440

Figure 318: Method Based Multiplier - Proportional

Caution: Not all business rules used to create the entries below are shown above.

Proportional Method Results In this section you will go over the accounting entries for the Proportional Method. A credit of (16,250) to eliminate the cash not owned (AJ_PROP). A credit of (80,000) to clear out the investment (AJ_COI1). A debit of 80,000 for the Goodwill account (AJ_COI2). A credit of (48,750) for the Goodwill account (AJ_COI3). A debit of (16,250) (AJ_PROP) and (48,750) (AJ_COI3) for the equity. Note: It would be better to have both Goodwill entries post against the same Entity and Intercompany members. That solution, Swap Entity / Intco is coming right up.

418


2011

BPC440


Figure 319: Proportional Preliminary Initial Results

Using the Swap Entity / Intco Feature The Entity and Intercompany members will now be swapped.

Figure 320: ELCOI3 Detail with Proportional Accounts - Revised

The Goodwill entries are now showing up against the correct Entity and Intercompany members.

2011


419


BPC440

Figure 321: Proportional Revised Result

420


2011

BPC440

411


Exercise 14: Create the Equity Elimination Business Rules Exercise Duration: 40 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure the business rules for equity elimination. • Explain the entries generated by the system.

Business Example Your company has many legal subsidiaries and they are less than 50% owned. You are interested in seeing how to configure the business rules to perform this automatically for the equity method.

Task 1: Create the method-based multipliers for the Equity Elimination scenario. 1.

Open the Method-Based Multipliers table in the Administration Web client.

2.

Change the RULE 10 method-based multiplier rule as shown below.

Figure 322: Equity Rule 10

3.



2011


421


BPC440


4.

Create the RULE 200 method-based multiplier rule as shown below.

Figure 324: Rule 200

Task 2: Configure the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs for the equity elimination. 1.

Change your ELCOI1 rule ID detail data as shown below. Note: The general data will remain unchanged.


422


2011

BPC440


Figure 325: ELCOI1 Detail with Equity Accounts

2.




2011


423


3.

BPC440



4.

Create your ELEQY rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below.

Figure 328: ELEQY General

Task 3: Execute consolidation. 1.

Access the Consolidation Monitor. Continued on next page

424


2011

BPC440


2.

Execute Consolidation for Actuals, 2011.12, and G_CG4.


Connect to the Legal model in the Excel interface of the EPM add-in.

2.



Company

This can be any value(*)

Consgroup

G_CG4 - Asia Pacific

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco

TOTAL - Total

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

Note: * Some dimensions are already determined in the report rows and columns.

2011

3.

Review your results in the BPC440 Cons CG4 report.

4.

Save the report.


425


BPC440

Solution 14: Create the Equity Elimination Business Rules Task 1: Create the method-based multipliers for the Equity Elimination scenario. 1.

2.

Open the Method-Based Multipliers table in the Administration Web client. a)


b)


c)

Under Global Definitions, chooseMethod-Based Multipliers.



a)

Highlight Rule010 and choose Edit.

b)

Enter your data as shown above. Entities with Method - 30 will be eliminated with the POWN %. Entities with Method - 90 and Intco members with Method - 30 will be eliminated 100%.

c) 3.




426


2011

BPC440



a)


b)

Enter the data as shown above. Entities with Method - 30 will be eliminated with the POWN %.

c) 4.


Create the RULE 200 method-based multiplier rule as shown below.


a)

Under Method-Based Multipliers, choose New .

b)

Enter your data as shown above. The E - Equity Type is a global type rule in that it will eliminate balance sheet values automatically without any detailed account assignments in the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs.

c)

Choose Save → Close → Return to Business Rules. Continued on next page

2011


427


BPC440

Task 2: Configure the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs for the equity elimination. 1.



a)

Under Legal, choose Eliminations and Adjustments. .

b)

Choose ELCOI1.

c)

Go to the Details tab.

d)

Make your selections as shown above. The values for the 12312000 Source Account are posted to the 12412000 Destination All Account with the sign reversed, using Rule060.

e) 2.




428


2011

BPC440



a)

Under Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs: LEGAL, choose ELCOI2.

b)


c)

Make your selections as shown above. The values for the 25120000 Source Account are posted to the 12312000 Destination All Account with the sign reversed, using Rule010. The values for the 25120000 Source Account are posted to the 12412000 Destination All Account using Rule010.

d) 3.




2011


429


BPC440


a)

Under Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs: LEGAL, choose ELCOI3.

b)


c)

Make your selections as shown above. The values for the 12312000 Source Account are posted to the 12312000 Destination Group Account with the sign reversed using Rule060.

d) 4.


Create your ELEQY rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below.


430


2011

BPC440


Figure 335: ELEQY General

a)


b)

Enter the general data as shown above When ELEQY is triggered, the destination data source AJ_EQUIMETH will be used. Since this is a Global scenario, select the E - Equity Adjustment Type. The E - Equity Adjustment Type does not require any account assignments on the Details tab.

c)


Task 3: Execute consolidation. 1.

Access the Consolidation Monitor. a)



2011


431


2.

BPC440

Execute Consolidation for Actuals, 2011.12, and G_CG4. a)

b)

Highlight G_CG4 and choose Consolidate. Make your selections as shown below. Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL

Time

2011.12

Consgroup

G_CG4

Execution Mode

Full Consolidation



Connect to the Legal model in the Excel interface of the EPM add-in. a)

On the Web client Start Page, choose EPM Office Add-in Excel. The EPM - Connection Manager appears.

2.

b)

Choose Legal - BPC440_##.

c)

Choose OK.



Company


Consgroup

G_CG4 - Asia Pacific

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco

TOTAL - Total


432


2011

BPC440


Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

Note: * Some dimensions are already determined in the report rows and columns. a) 3.


Review your results in the BPC440 Cons CG4 report. a)

On the upper left, choose Office → Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Cons CG4→ Open.

b)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 336: Equity Elimination Results

The following entries were created: A credit of 65,000 for cash. (AJ_EQMETH) A credit of 26,000 for the investment. AJ_COI3) A debit of 19,500 for the investment, therefore a net credit of 6,500. (AJ_COI2) A credit of 19,500 in the Goodwill account. (AJ_COI2) A debit of 26,000 in the Goodwill account, therefore a net debit of 6,500. (AJ_COI1) A debit of 65,000 in the subsidiary equity account to clear it. (AJ_EQMETH) 4.

2011

Save the report. a)


b)


c)

Choose Save.


433


434


BPC440

2011

BPC440

425


Exercise 15: Create the Proportional Business Rules Exercise Duration: 60 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure the business rules to do proportional elimination. • Explain the entries generated by the system.

Business Example Your company has many legal subsidiaries and they are more than 50% owned. You are interested in seeing how to configure the business rules to perform this automatically by using the Proportional method.

Task 1: Configure the method-based multipliers that you need in this Proportional Elimination scenario. 1.

Open the Method-Based Multipliers table in the Administration Web client.

2.

Change the RULE 10 Method-Based Multiplier Rule as shown below.

Figure 337: Rule 10 with Proportional

3.



2011


435


BPC440


4.

Create the RULE 210 Method-Based Multiplier Rule as shown below. Set the type to P - (Proportionate).



436


2011

BPC440


Task 2: Configure the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs for the proportional elimination. 1.

Add the proportional accounts to the ELCOI1 rule ID. Note: The general data is unchanged.

Figure 340: ELCOI1 Detail with Proportional Accounts

2.

Change your ELCOI2 rule ID detail data as shown below. Note: The general data is the same.


2011


437


BPC440


3.



438


2011

BPC440



4.

Create your ELPRO rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below.

Figure 343: ELPRO General


2011


439


BPC440

Task 3: Review the logic file for consolidation in your Legal model. Note: The following section of this lab includes the steps to run consolidation via a Data Manager package that uses script logic. This is an option for customers who want to schedule this job or use their own script. 1.

Go to the Legal model Logic Scripts.

2.

Review the logic script file in the Legal model.

Task 4: Create the Legal Consolidation Data Manager package. 1.

Go to the EPM add-in for Legal.

2.

In the EPM add-in, add the Data Manager package for the BPC: Legal Consolidation process chain.

Task 5: Execute the Consolidation package. 1.

2.

Run the Consolidation package for the following selections: Dimension

Member

C_Category

Actual

Time

2011.12

Consgroup

G_CG3

Set your EPM context as shown below Dimension


Company

Any value is okay (*)

Consgroup

G_CG3 - America

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco



440


2011

BPC440


Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

Note: (*) Some members are determined in the rows and columns of the report. 3.

In the EPM add-in, review your results in the BPC440 Cons CG3 report.

4.

Save the report.

Task 6: Change your business rules to switch the Entity and Intco member IDs in the AJ_COI3 posting. 1.

Change your ELCOI3 rule ID detail data as shown below.


2.

From the Consolidation Monitor, execute Consolidate.

Task 7: Review your results.

2011

1.

Go to the Excel interface of the EPM add-in.

2.

Refresh the BPC440 Cons CG3 report.


441


BPC440

Solution 15: Create the Proportional Business Rules Task 1: Configure the method-based multipliers that you need in this Proportional Elimination scenario. 1.

2.

Open the Method-Based Multipliers table in the Administration Web client. a)


b)


c)




a)


b)

In Row 4 enter your data as shown above. Entities with the 70 method will be eliminated with the POWN % for the Destination All Accounts and 100% for the Destination Group Accounts.

c) 3.




442


2011

BPC440



a)


b)

In row 3 enter your data as shown above. Entities with the Method - 70 will be eliminated 100% for the Destination All Accounts and POWN% for the Destination Group Accounts.

c) 4.


Create the RULE 210 Method-Based Multiplier Rule as shown below. Set the type to P - (Proportionate).


2011


443


BPC440


a)


b)

Enter your data as shown above. The P - (Proportionate) type is a global type rule in that it will eliminate balance sheet values automatically without any detailed account assignments in the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs. Entities with the Method - 70 method will be eliminated with 1-POWN for the Destination All Accounts.

c)


Task 2: Configure the Eliminations and Adjustments Rule IDs for the proportional elimination. 1.

Add the proportional accounts to the ELCOI1 rule ID. Note: The general data is unchanged.


444


2011

BPC440



a)

Under Legal, choose Eliminations and Adjustments.

b)

Under ID, choose ELCOI1.

c)


d)

In rows 3 and 4, make your selections as shown above. The values for the 12313000 Source Account are posted to the 12313000 Destination All Account using Rule060. The values for the 25130000 Source Account are posted to the 25130000 Destination All Account using Rule010.

e) 2.




2011


445


BPC440


a)

Under ID, choose ELCOI2.

b)


c)

In row 4, make your selections as shown above. The values for the 12313000 Source Account are posted to the 12413000 Destination All Account with the sign reversed, using Rule060.

d) 3.




446


2011

BPC440



a)

Under ID, coose ELCOI3.

b)


c)

In row 3, make your selections as shown above. The values for the 25130000 Source Account are posted to the 12413000 Destination All Account with the sign reversed, using Rule010. The Entity and Intco members will not be swapped.

d) 4.


Create your ELPRO rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below.


2011


447


BPC440

Figure 351: ELPRO General

a)

Choose New.

b)

Enter the general data as shown above. When ELPRO is triggered, the Destination Data SourceAJ_PROP will be used. Since this is a Global scenario, we use the P - Proportionate Adjustment Type. For this type, no account assignments are necessary on the Details tab. Choose Save → Close → Return to Business Rules.

c)

Task 3: Review the logic file for consolidation in your Legal model. Note: The following section of this lab includes the steps to run consolidation via a Data Manager package that uses script logic. This is an option for customers who want to schedule this job or use their own script. 1.

Go to the Legal model Logic Scripts. a)

Under Rules, choose Logic Scripts → Scripts for: Legal.


448


2011

BPC440


2.

Review the logic script file in the Legal model. a)

Choose CONSOLIDATION.LGF. Hint: If you receive an error message, choose Validate.

Figure 352: Legal Consolidation Logic

b)

Choose Close → Return to Logic Scripts. This code will run both currency translation as well as consolidation, and will be triggered in this case by a Data Manager package instead of the Consolidation Monitor (no logic script is used in this case). Incremental_Mode = means Full currency translation, for example.

Task 4: Create the Legal Consolidation Data Manager package. 1.

Go to the EPM add-in for Legal. a)


b)

Choose Legal - BPC440_## → OK. Continued on next page

2011


449


2.

BPC440

In the EPM add-in, add the Data Manager package for the BPC: Legal Consolidation process chain. a)


b)


c)

Create a new package. Choose Organize → Organize Package List → Choose the Financial Process Package Group.

d)

Right click in the area as shown below.


e)

Choose Add Package.

f)

Under Legal, choose Business Planning and Consolidation: Script Logic → BPC: Consolidation → OK.

g)

In the Package Name and Description fields, enter Consolidation.

h)

Select both the Admin Package and User Package task types.

i)

Choose Add.

j)

Right click the new package Modify Package.

k)

Choose Modify Script.

l)

Choose Advanced.

m)

In the Prompt line, replace Currency with Group. You have modified the package to use the group dimension instead of currency.

n)

Choose OK → Save → Save → Close. Continued on next page

450


2011

BPC440


Task 5: Execute the Consolidation package. 1.

2.

Run the Consolidation package for the following selections: Dimension

Member

C_Category

Actual

Time

2011.12

Consgroup

G_CG3

a)

Choose Run Package.

b)

Under Package Groups, choose Financial Process → Consolidation → Run.

c)


d)


e)

Choose View Status.

f)


g)

Close the popups.

Set your EPM context as shown below Dimension


Company


Consgroup

G_CG3 - America

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco


Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

Note: (*) Some members are determined in the rows and columns of the report. a)

Left click in the dimension member fields to adopt the above selections. Continued on next page

2011


451


3.

BPC440

In the EPM add-in, review your results in the BPC440 Cons CG3 report. a)

On the upper left, choose Office → Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 Con CG3 → Open.

b)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 354: Proportional Preliminary Result

These entries were created: A credit of 16,250 to eliminate the cash not owned (AJ_PROP). A credit of 80,000 to clear the investment (AJ_COI1). A debit of 80,000 for the Goodwill account (AJ_COI2). A credit of 48,750 for the Goodwill account (AJ_COI3). A debit of 16,250 (AJ_PROP) and 48,750 (AJ_COI3) for the equity. However, the goodwill entries do not show up against the correct entity and intercompany members. (This was intentional). 4.

Save the report. a)


b)


c)

Choose Save.

Task 6: Change your business rules to switch the Entity and Intco member IDs in the AJ_COI3 posting. 1.

Change your ELCOI3 rule ID detail data as shown below.


452


2011

BPC440



a)

Go to the Web client Administration tab.

b)

Under Legal, choose Eliminations and Adjustments.

c)

Under ID Choose ELCOI3

d)


e)

In row 3, select Swap Entity - Intco. The Entity and Intco members are now swapped.

f)

ChooseSave → Close → Return to Business Rules.


2011


453


2.

BPC440

From the Consolidation Monitor, execute Consolidate. a)

On the Home tab, choose Consolidation Central → Consolidation Monitor.

b)

Highlight G_CG3 and choose Consolidate. Make your selections as shown below.

c)

Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL

Time

2011.12

Consgroup

G_CG3

Execution Mode

Full Consolidation


Task 7: Review your results. 1.

Go to the Excel interface of the EPM add-in. a)

2.

Choose the EPM add-in in your status bar.

Refresh the BPC440 Cons CG3 report. a)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 356: Proportional Revised Result

The goodwill entries now show up against the correct entity and intercompany members.

454


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Configure business rules for an Equity and Proportional method

2011


455


Lesson: 446

BPC440

Matching Intercompany Lesson Duration: 40 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn the business reasons and setup for intercompany matching.


State the possible reasons to use a separate Model for Matching Configure business rules to book differences Discuss the master data, properties, logic, and packages required Describe the output generated

Let’s make sure the students know the intercompany matching app is optional. We need to be clear about the benefits of using one and also the cost of maintaining an additional app as well. I expect most customers will want to do matching in the legal app.

Business Example During the close, your company has been struggling with differences in the intercompany Accounts Receivable / Accounts Payable elimination. One of the problems is that accountants in one area don’t have access to see the data for the other divisions they do internal business with. The option of using one model with data access controlled via member access profiles for the data source dimension may make security too complex. For this reason, you need to consider using the intercompany matching model.

Intercompany Matching in General Here is some background on intercompany matching. Caution: Matching in Planning and Consolidation is a different solution than the SAP BusinessObjects Intercompany solution.

456


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Matching Intercompany

Figure 357: Traditional Intercompany Matching Process

Intercompany booking concentrates into each entity the declarations and reported balances of all other entities versus a specific entity. This allows business users within each reporting entity to run a report that matches all of its declarations and reported balances against the balances of the rest of the entities without the need to assign to each owner read access into other entities.

2011


457


BPC440

Figure 358: Advantages of a Peer to Peer Matching Process

Note: Ideally, if these differences can be resolved in the source system before the data is imported into the Planning and Consolidation InfoCube, the matching process could be eliminated.

How Many Models Do You Need? In this section you will learn about the option of using a separate Model including the data flow. Caution: The criteria below should be considered in making this decision. These are some of the guidelines to help you make the decision, not necessarily hard and fast rules. Here are some of the decision criteria to decide how many Models to use for Matching:

Decision Criteria

Solution: Use Two Models

The Matching Model has different dimensions than the Consolidation Model

X

You want to secure data using the DataSource Dimension

X

Solution: Use One Model

An additional Model to maintain

X

The adjusting entries would need to be imported into the Consolidation Model

X

You want to do Matching in a Model with fewer records Currency translation configuration and execution is per Model

X X

Note: If you do matching in the Consolidation Model and you secure data via datasource, then your security schema may be more complex and difficult to manage.

458


2011

BPC440


If you do use a separate Model for Matching, this would be the data flow process: 1. 2. 3.

Import all data into the Consolidation Model Import intercompany data into the Matching Model Carry out the Matching process: Run Currency translation Run ICData to copy the data into unique data source members to facilitate the reconciliation • Run ICBooking to generate the balancing entries Import the balancing entries from the Matching Model into the Consolidation Model Run Consolidation in the Consolidation Model

• •

4. 5.

Set Up and Run Currency Translation In this section you will learn about the components and process for currency translation. Note: All of the processing for Matching is carried out via the Data Manager, not Consolidation Central. The components for currency translation are shown below. • • •

The FXTRANS Logic File The Currency Translation Business Rule The FX Restatement Package

The logic file for currency translation will translate into a reporting currency that is selected at runtime.

2011


459


BPC440

Figure 359: Intercompany Matching FXTRANS Logic

The concepts for currency translation are the same as what you learned in the currency translation unit earlier. In the example below, accounts with an AVG rate type will be translated using the AVG rate.


The Local Currency (LC) data in ICMatching was imported from the ECCDATA InfoCube earlier in the class. In the example below, the LC is EUR.

460


2011

BPC440


Figure 361: ICM Currency Report - After Translation

Set Up and Run ICData The components for ICData are shown below. • • •

The ICDATA Logic File The ICData Package The DataSource Dimension Note: There is no business rule for ICData.

Below, you can see the required logic for ICData.

Figure 362: ICData Logic

Dimensions Used in Matching • •

The application must include an Intercompany dimension of type I. The intercompany dimension must include the property ENTITY , whose values are Entity names.

The incoming data has a datasource member of INPUT. The ICDATA program copies from the INPUT Datasource into the Credit and Debit members based on the Intercompany_ORIGINE property.

2011


461


BPC440

Figure 363: Matching DataSource Members

The ICDATA package copies the data to unique data source members to make reconciliation easier.

Figure 364: Intercompany Matching Summary - After Intercompany Data

Set Up and Run ICBooking The components for ICBooking are shown below. • • •

The ICBOOKING Logic File The Intercompany Bookings Business Rule The ICBooking Package

This is the logic for ICBooking.

462


2011

BPC440


Figure 365: ICBooking Logic

Below is an S - Seller rule that will post intercompany differences to the buyer. Note: Seller rules assume that the Seller is correct and therefore the difference goes to the buyer.

Figure 366: Intercompany Bookings Business Rule

Intercompany Bookings Business Rule Fields

2011

Field

Definition

ID

The parent of the accounts to include in the processing.

Description

Description of the rule.


463


Type

BPC440

Determines whether the buyer or seller receives the difference. • • •

S - Seller: Buyer receives the difference B - Buyer: Seller receives the difference G - Greatest: Entity with the greatest amount receives the difference

Other Destination Dimension

Target dimension member other than account, flow, and intercompany.

Max Booking Amount

The limit of the balancing entry. Differences above this amount will not post.

Debit Account

Debit account for the difference

Debit Flow

Debit flow for the difference

Debit Intco

Debit intercompany for the difference

Credit Account

Credit account for the difference

Credit Flow

Credit flow for the difference

Credit Intco

Credit intercompany for the difference

When the ICData package is executed from the Data Manager, the DEBIT and CREDIT entries are generated.

Figure 367: Intercompany Matching Summary After Booking

The ICBOOKING package posts offsetting entries to make intercompany Accounts Payable equal Accounts Receivable.

464


2011

BPC440

455


Exercise 16: Configure Intercompany Matching Exercise Duration: 45 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Identify the components required to do intercompany matching. • Describe the difference between the ICData and ICBooking programs.

Business Example You need to find a solution to resolve intercompany differences for accounts payable and receivable, and therefore need to know how to set up and execute the reconciliation and booking solution.

Task 1: Review the logic files for currency translation, ICData and ICBooking, in your intercompany matching model. 1.

Review the code for the FXTRANS, ICDATA, and ICBOOKING logic files.

2.

Review theICDATA and ICBOOKING logic files.

Task 2: Review the master data that is unique to intercompany matching. 1.

Review the master data in the ICAccount dimension.

2.

Review the master data in the ICDataSrc dimension.


Activate the Currency Translation rule type for your ICMatching model.

2.

Configure currency translation as shown below.


2011


465


BPC440


3.

Create a new Currency Translation rule as shown below.

Figure 369: End Flow Rate Type

Task 4: Configure the Intercompany Bookings business rule. 1.

Activate the Intercompany Bookings rule type for your ICMatching model.

2.

Configure the Intercompany Bookings rule type as shown below.


466


2011

BPC440



Task 5: Add the Data Manager packages for ICData and ICBooking to your ICMatching model in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1.

Connect to ICMatching.

2.

Add the Intercompany Data package.

3.

Add the Intercompany Booking package.

Task 6: Execute the FX Restatement Package 1.

2.

In the EPM add-in for ICMatching, run the FX Restatement package for the following selections: Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

Set your EPM context as shown below. Continued on next page

2011


467


Dimension


Company


Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Flow


ICAccount

Any value is okay

ICDatasrc

Input - Company Input

Intco

TOTAL - Total

Rptcurrency

Any value is okay

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

3.

In the EPM add-in, open the provided BPC440 ICM Currency report.

4.

Save the template.

5.

Run the Intercompany Data package for the following selections. Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

ACTUAL

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

6.

In the EPM add-in, open the provided BPC440 IC Matching Summary.

7.

Save the template.

8.

Run the Intercompany Booking package for the following selections. View the results in the BPC440 IC Matching Summary report.

9.

468

BPC440

Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

ACTUAL

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

Refresh your IC Matching Summary and note the two additional postings for the difference.


2011

BPC440


Solution 16: Configure Intercompany Matching Task 1: Review the logic files for currency translation, ICData and ICBooking, in your intercompany matching model. 1.

Review the code for the FXTRANS, ICDATA, and ICBOOKING logic files. a)

Under Rules, choose Logic Scripts → Scripts for: ICMatching.

b)

Under Scripts for: ICMatching, choose FXTRANS.LGF.

Figure 371: Intercompany Matching FXTRANS Logic

c) 2.

Choose Close.

Review theICDATA and ICBOOKING logic files. a)

Choose ICDATA. You should have a script that calls the ICDATA program and has prompts for dimension members.

b)

Choose Close.

c)

Choose ICBOOKING. You should have a script that calls the ICBOOKING program and has prompts for dimension members.

d)

Choose Close → Return to Logic Scripts. Continued on next page

2011


469


BPC440

Task 2: Review the master data that is unique to intercompany matching. 1.

Review the master data in the ICAccount dimension. a)

Under Administration of BPC440_##, choose Dimensions and Models → Dimensions.

b)

Under ID, choose ICAccount. Note the rate type for Intercompany Accounts Payable (IC AP) and Intercompany Accounts Receivable (IC AR ) is Endflow.

c) 2.

Choose Close.

Review the master data in the ICDataSrc dimension. a)

Under ID, select ICDataSrc. Note the IS_Converted (ID) - Is Translated? (description) property for INPUT is Y. In addition, you can see the Intercompany_ORIGINE property values the system uses to copy the values to the debit and credit members.

b)

Choose Close.


Activate the Currency Translation rule type for your ICMatching model. a)


b)

Choose the row for ICMatching → Add / Remove Rule Types.

c)

Select Currency Translation and choose OK. You can now use the Currency Translation rule.

2.

Configure currency translation as shown below.


470


2011

BPC440



a)

Under ICMatching, choose Currency Translation.

b)

Choose New.

c)


d)

Next to Description, enter Accounts with the AVG Rate Type.

e)

Make your other selections as shown above. Accounts with an AVG rate type will be translated at an average rate.

f) 3.


Create a new Currency Translation rule as shown below.


2011


471


BPC440

Figure 373: End Flow Rate Type

a)

Choose New.

b)


c)

Next to Description, enter Accounts with the ENDFLOW Rate Type.

d)

Make your other selections as shown above. Accounts with an ENDFLOW rate type will be translated at the End rate.

e)

Choose Save.

f)

Choose Close → Return to Business Rules.

Task 4: Configure the Intercompany Bookings business rule. 1.

Activate the Intercompany Bookings rule type for your ICMatching model. a)

Choose the row for ICMatching → Add / Remove Rule Types.

b)

Select Intercompany Bookings and choose OK. Now you can use the Intercompany Bookings rule.

2.

Configure the Intercompany Bookings rule type as shown below.


472


2011

BPC440



a)

Under ICMatching, choose Intercompany Bookings.

b)

Choose New.

c)

Next to ID, select the CTLICEND00 parent account.

d)

Next to Description, enter Parent Matching Account.

e)

Make your other selections as shown above. You have configured a Seller rule (that is, the seller is correct) that will post intercompany differences to the buyer.

f)


Task 5: Add the Data Manager packages for ICData and ICBooking to your ICMatching model in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. 1.

Connect to ICMatching. a)

On the upper left, choose Log Off → Log On.

b)

Click the Connection ellipse button. The EPM - Connection Manager opens.

c)

Choose ICMatching - BPC440_## → OK. Continued on next page

2011


473


2.

BPC440

Add the Intercompany Data package. a)


b)


c)

Under ICMatching, choose the Financial Process Package Group.

d)

Right click and choose Add Package.

e)

Choose Select.

f)

Choose Business Planning and Consolidation: Script Logic → BPC: IC Data → OK. Next to Package Name, enter ICDATA.

3.

g)

Next to Description, enter ICDATA.

h)

Under Task Types, select the Admin Package and User Package.

i)

Choose Add.

Add the Intercompany Booking package. a)

Right click and choose Add Package.

b)

Choose Select.

c)

Choose Business Planning and Consolidation: Script Logic → BPC: IC Booking→ OK. Enter ICBOOKING for the Package Name and Description.

d)

Under Task Types, select Admin Package and User Package.

e)

Choose Add → Close.

Task 6: Execute the FX Restatement Package 1.

In the EPM add-in for ICMatching, run the FX Restatement package for the following selections:


474


2011

BPC440


Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

a)

Choose Run Package.

b)

Under ICMatching, choose Financial Process → FX Restatement→ Run.

c)


d)

Choose Next → Finish → OK. You have now executed currency translation.

2.

e)

Choose View Status, double-click the log, and choose the Formula Log to see the details.

f)

Close the popups.



Company


Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Flow


ICAccount

Any value is okay

ICDatasrc

Input - Company Input

Intco

TOTAL - Total

Rptcurrency

Any value is okay

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a)

Left click in the dimension member fields to adopt the above selections. Note: * Some members are determined in the rows and columns.


2011


475


3.

BPC440

In the EPM add-in, open the provided BPC440 ICM Currency report. a)


b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 ICM Currency → Open.

c)


Figure 375: ICM Currency Report - After Translation

4.

5.



b)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 ICM Currency.

c)

Choose Save.

Run the Intercompany Data package for the following selections. Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

ACTUAL

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

a)

In the Data Manager tab, choose Run Package. The Run Package dialog opens.

b)

Under ICMatching, choose Financial Process → ICDATA → Run.

c)


d)


e)

Choose View Status, double-click the log, and choose the Formula Log to see the details. ICDATA copies the data to unique data source members to make reconciliation easier.

f)

Close the popups. Continued on next page

476


2011

BPC440


6.

In the EPM add-in, open the provided BPC440 IC Matching Summary. a)


b)

Choose BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 IC Matching Summary → Open.

c)


Figure 376: Intercompany Matching Summary - After ICData

7.

8.



b)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 IC Matching Summary.

c)

Choose Save.

Run the Intercompany Booking package for the following selections. View the results in the BPC440 IC Matching Summary report.


2011


477


BPC440

Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

ACTUAL

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

a)


b)

Under ICMatching, choose Financial Process → ICBOOKING→ Run.

c)


d)


e)

Choose View Status, double-click the log, and choose the Formula Log to see the details. ICBOOKING posts offsetting entries to make Intercompany Accounts Payable equal Accounts Receivable.

9.

f)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Run Package → Financial Process → ICBOOKING → Run.

g)


h)


i)

Choose View Status, double-click the log, and choose the Formula Log to see the details.

j)

Close the popups.

Refresh your IC Matching Summary and note the two additional postings for the difference. a)


Figure 377: IC Matching Summary After Posting

You have executed the Seller rule correctly. The buyer C2000 received the difference postings.

478


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • State the possible reasons to use a separate Model for Matching • Configure business rules to book differences • Discuss the master data, properties, logic, and packages required • Describe the output generated

2011


479


Lesson: 470

BPC440

Eliminating Intercompany Receivables and Payables Lesson Duration: 25 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn the business reasons and setup for the Receivables and Payables elimination.


Configure business rules for the Receivables and Payables elimination Recite the business reasons for eliminating intercompany activity

IU eliminations are a little easier to understand than COI. However, be careful if the question regarding profit on inventory eliminations comes up. These are usually done offline. Make sure you are also comfortable with the data generated by the system.

Business Example The subsidiaries to be consolidated have reported values for intercompany receivables and payables. This intercompany activity must be eliminated.

Intercompany Transactions in General A consolidated balance sheet shows only payables and receivables that relate to non-affiliated (third-party) companies. Payables and receivables resulting from the exchange of goods and services within the corporate group must be eliminated otherwise they would be double counted. The types of intercompany activity that require elimination include: • • • • • •

480

Intercompany accounts payable and accounts receivable. Intercompany loans and interest. Intercompany profit on fixed asset transfers. Intercompany royalties. Intercompany revenue and cost of goods sold. Intercompany dividends.


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Eliminating Intercompany Receivables and Payables

If the financial statements are merely summed up, the aggregated balance sheet would include intercompany activity. Those values must be eliminated. Note: The values below include a difference between Intercompany Receivables and Payables, therefore Matching Adjustments are required.

Figure 378: Elimination of Intercompany Payables and Receivables

How Does It Work? This is the data set for the example below. Company C1000 sold goods to C2000 for 27,300. The Intercompany Receivables and Payables are still open. Note: You will eliminate the Revenue and Cost after this lesson. Data for the Example

Parent

Entity

11301100 InterCompany Method POWNReceivable

G_CG2 C1000

90

1.00

G_CG2 C2000

86

.80

21171000 InterCompany Payable

27,300 27,300

Note: InterCompany Matching has already taken place in this example, therefore AP = AR.

2011


481


BPC440

These are the processing steps when consolidation is executed for G_CG2. 1. 2. 3.

The source values are read into memory The formulas are looked up The source values multiplied by the formulas are posted to the destination accounts and datasource

Figure 379: Receivables and Payables Processing Steps

When you run the Receivables and Payables Elimination for example, the components you need depends on whether you use the Consolidation Monitor vs. the Data Manager to execute the job.

Components The components for Receivables and Payables Elimination Component

482

Consolidation Monitor

Data Manager

Consolidation Model

X

X

Ownership Model

X

X

Rate Model

X

X

Currency Translation Business Rule

X

X

Methods Business Rule

X

X


2011

BPC440


Methods-Based Multipliers Business Rule

X

X

Eliminations and Adjustments Business Rule

X

X

FXTrans Logic File

X

Consolidation Logic File

X

Consolidation Data Package

X

The Business Rules In this section you will learn how to set up the business rules. The rule shown below will do the following: • •

Select Entities with Method Codes of 86 and 90 and Intercompany members with any (99) Method Code. Write 100% of the source value multiplied by -1 into the ALL account specified in Eliminations and Adjustments Note: Assignments via ALL will have their signs reversed.

•

Write 100% of the source values into the Group account specified in the Eliminations and Adjustments

Figure 380: Rule 40

Note: 1 = 100% In the General tab of the Eliminations and Adjustments table below: when ELPAR is triggered, the Destination Data Source - AJ_ELIM will be posted.

2011


483


BPC440

Figure 381: ELPAR General

In the Detail tab of the Eliminations and Adjustments table below:

484

•

The inverse value in the Source Accounts will be written to the Destination All Accounts based on RULE040 Note: In RULE040 - Entity = Method Code - 86 / 90 and All / Group Formula = 100%

•

The value in the Source Accounts will also be written to the Destination Group Account - APAROFFSET with the same sign.


2011

BPC440


Figure 382: ELPAR Details

Consolidation Monitor Intercompany Elimination can be executed from either the Consolidation Monitor or the Data Manager.


The Results 100% of the intercompany Receivable and Payable was eliminated. Note: The target data source member - AJ_ELIM was determined via the Rule ID - ELPAR in the Eliminations and Adjustments business rule.

2011


485


BPC440

Figure 384: Receivable and Payable Elimination Results

486


2011

BPC440

477


Exercise 17: Create Business Rules for Intercompany Receivables and Payables Elimination Exercise Duration: 50 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure business rules for intercompany elimination. • Discuss the components required. • Explain the data generated by the consolidation program.

Business Example Your legal subsidiaries transfer goods and services to each other. You need to eliminate the intercompany accounts payable and receivables for the transactions that have not cleared yet, so that you only report external receivables and payables on the consolidated balance sheet.

Task 1: Create an additional multiplier for your Legal model. 1.

Go to the Method-Based Multipliers table.

2.

Create the RULE040 Method-Based Multiplier Rule as shown below.


2011


487


BPC440

Figure 385: Rule040

Note: 1= 100%

Task 2: Create the Intercompany Receivables and Payables Eliminations and Adjustments Rule ID. 1.

Create your ELPAR rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below. Note: ELPAR stands for Elimination for Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable.


488


2011

BPC440



2.

Fill in the detail data as shown below. Hint: Select accounts based on their ARAP property value.



2011


489


BPC440

Task 3: Run Consolidation from the Consolidation Monitor. 1.

Access the Consolidation Monitor for your Legal model.

2.

Set your context as shown below: Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG1 - Corporate

3.

Execute Consolidation.

4.

The status of the members should be Done, as shown below.



Connect to the Legal model in the Excel interface of the EPM add-in.

2.



Company


Consgroup

G_CG2 - Europe

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco



490


2011

BPC440


Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

Note: * Some dimensions are already determined in the report rows and columns. 3.

Review the results in the BPC440 AR AP Elimination report.

4.

Save the report.

Task 5: Test the incremental consolidation execution mode.

2011

1.

Upload and preview the Updated AP AR Data file.

2.

Import the data.

3.

Execute Incremental Consolidation.

4.

Refresh your BPC440 AR AP Elimination report.


491


BPC440

Solution 17: Create Business Rules for Intercompany Receivables and Payables Elimination Task 1: Create an additional multiplier for your Legal model. 1.

Go to the Method-Based Multipliers table. a)


b)


c)


d)

Under Method-Based Multipliers, choose New. Method-based multipliers have two roles: 1. 2.

2.

They contain the formulas or multipliers They are used to select entity and intercompany members

Create the RULE040 Method-Based Multiplier Rule as shown below.


492


2011

BPC440


Figure 389: Rule040

Note: 1= 100% a)

Enter your data as shown above. This rule will: • •

Select entities with method codes of 86 and 90 and intercompany members with any (99) method code Write 100% of the source value multiplied by -1 into the ALL account specified in Eliminations and Adjustments Note: Assignments via ALL will have their signs reversed.

• b)

Write 100% of the source values into the Group account specified in the Eliminations and Adjustments.


Task 2: Create the Intercompany Receivables and Payables Eliminations and Adjustments Rule ID. 1.

Create your ELPAR rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below. Note: ELPAR stands for Elimination for Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable.


2011


493


BPC440


a)

Under Currency Translation, choose Eliminations and Adjustments.

b)


c)

Enter the general data as shown above. On the General tab of the Eliminations and Adjustments table above: When ELPAR is triggered, the Destination Data Source - AJ_ELIM will be posted.

2.

Fill in the detail data as shown below. Hint: Select accounts based on their ARAP property value.


494


2011

BPC440



a)

b)

On the Details tab, make your selections as shown above. •

The inverse value in the Source Accounts will be written to the Destination All Accounts based on RULE040. Note: In RULE040, Entity = Method Code - 86 / 90 and All / Group Formula = 100%

•

The value in the Source Accounts will also be written to the Destination Group Account - APAROFFSET with the same sign.


Task 3: Run Consolidation from the Consolidation Monitor. 1.

Access the Consolidation Monitor for your Legal model. a)

2.


Set your context as shown below:


2011


495


3.

Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG1 - Corporate

a)

Left click the context members to call the dropdown list and make your selections as shown above.

b)

Highlight the G_CG2 row.

Execute Consolidation. a)

4.

BPC440

With G_CG2 highlighted, choose Consolidate and make your selections as shown below. Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Consgroup

G_CG2 - Europe

Execution Mode

Full Consolidation

b)

Choose OK.

c)

After the job is complete, choose Choose.

The status of the members should be Done, as shown below.


a)

Your results should match the ones above.


496


2011

BPC440



2.

Connect to the Legal model in the Excel interface of the EPM add-in. a)


b)

Connect to Legal - BPC440_##.



Company


Consgroup

G_CG2 - Europe

C_Acct


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco


Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

Note: * Some dimensions are already determined in the report rows and columns. a)



2011


497


3.

BPC440

Review the results in the BPC440 AR AP Elimination report. a)

On the upper left, choose Office → Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 AR AP Elimination→ Open.

b)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 393: AR AP Elimination Results

100% of the intercompany AR AP is now eliminated. 4.

Save the report. a)


b)


c)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 AR AP Elimination.

d)

Choose Save.


498


2011

BPC440


Task 5: Test the incremental consolidation execution mode. 1.

Upload and preview the Updated AP AR Data file. a)


b)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Upload Data → Browse → Data(D:) → BPC440 → BPC440_## . Choose Updated AP AR Data → Open.

c)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Upload → Save → OK. The file is now on the server.

d)

Choose Data Preview.

e)

In the Open dialog, select the Updated AP AR Data file and choose Open.

f)

Under File type or table, choose Delimited.

g)

Under Select a delimiter, choose COMMA. In the first two rows, you will see an LC value of 25,000 for both Intercompany Receivables and Payables accounts. The values were 21,000 in the first import. The third and fourth records are there to keep the balanced sheet in balance.

h)

Choose Cancel.


2011


499


2.

BPC440

Import the data. a)

On the Data Manager tab, choose Run package.

b)

Under Package Name, choose Import transaction data last overwrite mode → Run.

c)

On the File Selection screen, choose Browse.

d)

Under Data Files, choose All Files.

e)

Choose Updated AP AR Data→ Open → Next. Caution: Do not use the default transformation file in the next step.

f)

Choose Browse → LEGALDATATRANS → Open → Next. The transformation file is selected

g)

Verify that the method for update is set to Merge and choose Next.

h)

Do not run default logic: Choose No → Next.

i)

Choose No, do not check for work status settings→ Next → Finish → OK.

j)

Choose View Status.

k)

Select the Refresh Status Every 5 Seconds checkbox.

l)

When the status is Succeed, double-click to see the log. 4 records were imported.

m)

Close the popups.


500


2011

BPC440


3.

Execute Incremental Consolidation. a)

In the Web client, select the Home tab and choose Consolidation Central → Consolidation Monitor.

b)

Choose Refresh. The status for Europe, Germany, and UK should be To Be Executed.

c)

Highlight G_CG2 - Europe, choose Consolidate, and make your selections as shown below.

Figure 394: Incremental Execution Mode

d)


e) 4.

Choose Close.

Refresh your BPC440 AR AP Elimination report. a)


Figure 395: Incremental Results

Incremental consolidation eliminated the new data records.

2011


501


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Configure business rules for the Receivables and Payables elimination • Recite the business reasons for eliminating intercompany activity

502


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 492

Lesson: Setting up Managerial Elimination (US)

Setting up Managerial Elimination (US) Lesson Duration: 25 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn the business reasons and setup for the US Intercompany Elimination.


Configure the US Elimination Business Rule for Revenue and Cost Describe the required master data properties Discuss the possibility of using this rule for managerial accounting

US elimination does not post to group members and that’s why it cannot normally be used for legal consolidation.

Business Example In a managerial accounting scenario, revenue has been generated within the group by exchanging goods and services with affiliated companies and needs to be eliminated.

US Elimination in General US Elimination can only be executed by running a Data Manager Package and not from the Consolidation Monitor. This is very straight forward to set up and is relevant only for managerial accounting scenarios.

Components The components for US Elimination Component

2011

Required

Consolidation or Financial Model

Yes

Ownership Model

No


503


Rate Model Currency Translation Business Rule

BPC440

Yes Optional

Methods Business Rule

No

Methods-Based Multipliers Business Rule

No

Eliminations and Adjustments Business Rule

No

US Eliminations Business Rule

Yes

FXTrans Logic File

Optional

Consolidation Logic File

No

ICElim Logic File

Yes

Consolidation Data Package

No

ICElim Data Package

Yes

Note: If you only have one currency, then translation would not be necessary. However, a Rate Model must exist for Financial and Consolidation Models. The assumption is also that US Elimination will not be triggered via the Default Logic file.

Master Data One of the prerequisites for US Elimination is to assign the offset accounts (such as USELIMDIFF in the example below) to the relevant intercompany accounts.

Figure 396: US Elimination - C_Acct

In the Entity dimension, the elimination entities must have an ELIM property value of Y. Note: The ELIM and ELIMACC properties are reserved key words and must not be spelled any other way.

504


2011

BPC440


Figure 397: ELIM Property - Company

Logic US Elimination uses the following logic script.

Figure 398: ICELIM Script

The Business Rule In this section you will see how to set up the business rule. This business rule only has three fields: 1. 2. 3.

Elimination ID - This is user defined. Source Data Source - This can be a base level or parent member. You can also filter via the Dimlist property Destination Data Source - This can be a base level or parent

In the rule below, INPUT source values will be posted to US_ELIM when US Elimination is executed.

2011


505


BPC440

Figure 399: US Elimination Rule

The Results A Data Manager package was run to generate the results below. Notice that the four records that were generated are all posted to the E_CG2 member. The results appear to be identical to the Intercompany Receivables and Payables Elimination however, the Group dimension member in this case is G_NONE not a valid intercompany member as it is for the receivables and payables elimination. Note: Normally, consolidated results in a statutory scenario are recorded in valid Group dimension members. Caution: When viewing data in reports, remember that the system will switch the sign if the account type is INC or LEQ. See the actual data from the InfoCube a little further down.

Figure 400: Elimination Result

This is the data in the InfoCube:

506


2011

BPC440


Figure 401: US Elimination - Data

2011


507


508


BPC440

2011

BPC440

497


Exercise 18: Configure US Elimination Exercise Duration: 25 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure US intercompany elimination. • Explain the accounting values it generates.

Business Example You company needs to carry out some straight forward revenue and cost of goods elimination at the group entity level.

Task 1: Configure the business rule. 1.

Activate Eliminations and Adjustments for your Legal model.

2.

Create your ICELIM rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below.

Figure 402: US Eliminations Rule

Task 2: Review the logic file for US Eliminations in your Legal model. 1.

Go to the logic files for Legal.

2.

Open your ICELIM script logic file in the Legal model.


2011


509


BPC440


3.

Confirm that your code exists.

Task 3: Review the master data that is unique to US Eliminations. 1.

Review the ELIMACC property values in the C_Acct dimension. Note the USELIMDIFF account that is an ELIMACC property value of the 30120000 and 30312000 accounts as shown below.

Figure 404: US Elim - C_Acct

2.

Review the master data in the Company dimension. Note the ELIM (ID) - Is Elimination Entity ? (description) property for the E_CG# is Y, as shown below.


510


2011

BPC440



Task 4: Create the IC Elimination Data Manager package. 1.

Log on to the Excel interface of the EPM add-in.

2.

In the Excel interface of the EPM add-in, add the Data Manager package for the BPC: IC Elimination.

Task 5: Execute the IC Elimination package 1.

2.

Use the following selections: Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12



Company

Any value is okay

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct

Any value is okay

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc

Any value is okay

Flow


Intco

Any value is okay Continued on next page

2011


511


512

BPC440

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollars

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

3.

In the EPM add-in, open the provided BPC440 US Elimination report.

4.

Save the report.


2011

BPC440


Solution 18: Configure US Elimination Task 1: Configure the business rule. 1.

Activate Eliminations and Adjustments for your Legal model. a)


b)


c)

Highlight the Legal row and choose Add / Remove Rule Types.

d)

Select US Eliminations and choose OK. The US Eliminations table is now available for use.

2.

Create your ICELIM rule ID and fill in the general data as shown below.

Figure 406: US Eliminations Rule

a)

Under Legal, choose US Eliminations. Enter the data as shown above. In the rule above, values for the INPUT data source will be posted to the US_ELIM data source member when US Elimination is executed.

b)


Task 2: Review the logic file for US Eliminations in your Legal model. 1.

Go to the logic files for Legal. a)

Choose Rules → Logic Scripts→Scripts for: Legal. Continued on next page

2011


513


2.

BPC440

Open your ICELIM script logic file in the Legal model.


a) 3.

Under Scripts for Legal, choose ICELIM.

Confirm that your code exists. a)

Your code should be identical to what is shown above.

b)


Task 3: Review the master data that is unique to US Eliminations. 1.

Review the ELIMACC property values in the C_Acct dimension. Note the USELIMDIFF account that is an ELIMACC property value of the 30120000 and 30312000 accounts as shown below.


514


2011

BPC440


Figure 408: US Elim - C_Acct

a)

Under Dimensions and Models, choose Dimensions → C_Acct.

b)

Locate the USELIMDIFF property value for ELIMACC as shown above. The USELIMDIFF account will be used as the offset account.

c) 2.

Choose Close.

Review the master data in the Company dimension. Note the ELIM (ID) - Is Elimination Entity ? (description) property for the E_CG# is Y, as shown below.


a)

Under Dimensions, choose Company.

b)

Locate the ELIM property values for the E_CG#s. These entities will receive all of the postings.

c)

Choose Close.


2011


515


BPC440

Task 4: Create the IC Elimination Data Manager package. 1.

2.

Log on to the Excel interface of the EPM add-in. a)


b)

Connect to Legal - BPC440_##.

In the Excel interface of the EPM add-in, add the Data Manager package for the BPC: IC Elimination. a)


b)

Create a new package: Choose Organize → Organize Package List and select the Financial Process Package Group.

c)

Right click in the area shown below:


d)

Choose Add Package → Select → Business Planning and Consolidation: Script Logic → BPC: IC Elimination→ OK.

e)

Under Package Name, enter IC Elimination.

f)

Under Description, enter IC Elimination.

g)

Select both the Admin Package and User Package task types.

h)

Choose Add → Close.


516


2011

BPC440


Task 5: Execute the IC Elimination package 1.

Use the following selections: Dimension

Member

Company

C1000,C2000

C_Category

Actual

RptCurrency

USD

Time

2011.12

a)


2.

b)

Under Legal, choose Financial Process → IC Elimination → Run.

c)

Use the data selections as shown above-

d)


e)

Choose View Status.

f)


g)

Close the popups.



Company

Any value is okay

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct

Any value is okay

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc

Any value is okay

Flow


Intco

Any value is okay

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollars

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a)

Left click in the dimension member fields to adopt the above selections. Continued on next page

2011


517


3.

BPC440

In the EPM add-in, open the provided BPC440 US Elimination report. a)

Choose Office → Open → BPC440 → BPC440_## → BPC440 US Elimination → Open.

b)

Choose Refresh.

Figure 411: Elimination Result

4.

518

Save the report. a)


b)


c)

In the File Name field, enter BPC440 US Elimination.

d)

Choose Save.


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Configure the US Elimination Business Rule for Revenue and Cost • Describe the required master data properties • Discuss the possibility of using this rule for managerial accounting

2011


519

Unit Summary

BPC440

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss the concepts of Consolidation of Investments • Personalize the Ownership Manager • Create an ownership hierarchy • Copy Ownership data to a different category and time • Execute Ownership calculations • Describe what the Business Rules do • Configure business rules for a Purchase method scenario • Identify the key dimensional properties • Explain the results of the elimination job • Configure business rules for an Equity and Proportional method • State the possible reasons to use a separate Model for Matching • Configure business rules to book differences • Discuss the master data, properties, logic, and packages required • Describe the output generated • Configure business rules for the Receivables and Payables elimination • Recite the business reasons for eliminating intercompany activity • Configure the US Elimination Business Rule for Revenue and Cost • Describe the required master data properties • Discuss the possibility of using this rule for managerial accounting

520


2011

Unit 5 Creating Controls and Business Process Flows

509

This lab cannot be run until after ownership is set up.

Unit Overview In this unit you will configure the Controls business rules and execute them from the Controls Monitor. You will also build and use a sample Business Process Flow for Consolidation.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • •

Define controls, control sets, and assignments Execute controls from the monitor Explain the status information displayed Use linked documents to easily access root cause information Create a Business Process Flow Run a Business Process Flow

Unit Contents Lesson: Using the Controls Monitor and Validating Data..................522 Exercise 19: Create Data Control Business Rules.....................537 Lesson: Creating Consolidation Business Process Flows ................559 Demonstration: Demo a BPF in run mode ..............................561 Procedure: Adding Hyperlinks ............................................569 Exercise 20: Create a Business Process Flow for Consolidation ....577

2011


521

Unit 5: Creating Controls and Business Process Flows

Lesson: 510

BPC440

Using the Controls Monitor and Validating Data Lesson Duration: 55 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to configure Controls and use the Controls Monitor to validate data.


Define controls, control sets, and assignments Execute controls from the monitor Explain the status information displayed Use linked documents to easily access root cause information

In 10.0 differences are no longer written to validation accounts.

Business Example You need to perform user defined checks after data entry or at subsequent points in the consolidation process to help ensure the completeness and accuracy of the data.

Controls in General Controls are an essential part of every consolidation model and they might also be useful in planning models. They are mainly used to control the consistency of financial data (for example that a Balance Sheet is balanced or that flow movements add up to the closing balance) Controls can be enforced (blocking controls) or just displayed as warnings, to inform users of potential problems.

522


2011

BPC440

Lesson: Using the Controls Monitor and Validating Data

The key features of Planning and Consolidation Controls are as follows. • • • • • • • • • • •

Controls Status can be viewed in the Controls Monitor Out of balances result in either Blocks in work status changes or Warnings Controls are Grouped into Sets Sets are Category and Time dependent Breakdown Dimensions allow balancing on additional dimensions Ratio comparisons are available The Source and Target dimensions include: Account, Flow, Intercompany, Datasource Balance on Reporting Currency or Local Currency Use Hypertext links to access root cause data Different Control Levels can be defined by Entity Blocks can be Dismissed (based on security)

Process Overview During one or more points in the closing process, the controls process could be carried out. Running Controls could include the following steps • • • • • •

Run Controls Review Controls data Identify issues in data Correct Data Re-run Controls Advance the Work State to Reviewed for example Note: Work Status is like Close Period. It can be used to prevent changes to data for a selected data region. Possible work states could include: – – – –

Start In Process Reviewed Final

Run Controls In this section you will learn how to use the Controls Monitor.

2011


523


BPC440

Prerequisites to use the Controls Monitor include: 1. 2. 3.

You have the View Controls task Work Status is turned on Controls have been configured and enabled

The Controls Monitor indicates the following for each entity: • • • • •

The Control set that has been assigned for the Category and Period The Status of the current control The Level of control applicable for that entity The Number of Blocking controls that have failed The Number of Warning controls that have failed


524


2011

BPC440


Figure 413: Controls Context

Control Results From the Controls Monitor the user can choose Open Control Results for a group or base level member. This view contains the detail about all the controls: • • • • • •

2011

A drilldown can be done on a control by clicking the triangle on the left of the control. The breakdown members indicate which member of the breakdown dimension is displayed. The Equation and Result columns show the calculations that are performed and the result. The Threshold column indicates the threshold that was defined for that period The Type column indicates whether the control is Blocking or Warning The Status column indicates if the control has passed, failed, or has been dismissed


525


BPC440

Figure 414: Control Results

Status Types • • • • •

To be executed: Control needs to be run (has not been executed yet or data has changed since last execution) Passed: Control passed successfully Failed: Data needs to be corrected Dismissed: Control was forced to pass Not Applicable: Control has not been executed Note: Status for groups are calculated on the fly, the group will always show the lowest status of all its children.

Identify Issues in Data It is very easy to see the data comparison performed by the control as well as the difference and the status.

Figure 415: Failed Control

526


2011

BPC440


Documents To assist with the root cause analysis, you can easily launch the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in or web reports. Use Hypertext to launch any of the following. • • • •

Excel Input Schedule Excel Report Web Report Web Input Form Note: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in is being referred to above as Excel. Note: When either an Excel Report or Excel Input Schedule is chosen, a separate session is opened in the Excel Interface of the EPM add-in. The Category, Entity, and Time dimensions are passed to the report, the rest of the dimension need to be selected manually in the report itself.

Dismissing Controls There may be cases were blocking controls need to be passed, although the data test is failing. For example, when there are some last minute corrections and the figures need to be published, although all the controls are not passed. For this exceptional case, there is the possibility to force a control to pass by dismissing it. A blocking control that has failed can be forced to pass, by highlighting the control in Control Results and clicking the Dismiss block button. The status would then be Dismissed and the work state can be advanced. Note: You can only perform this action if you have the Dismiss Blocking Controls task profile.

Using Thresholds In some cases, you may want to use a control that tests for accounts payable for example to be less than 10% of Cash. In the example below accounts payable is 10,000 vs. 10% of cash which is 3792 and so the test fails.

2011


527


BPC440

Figure 416: Threshold Control Results

Security There are several task profiles that control user activity. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

528

View Controls - Access Controls Monitor in read only mode. Run Controls - Access Controls Monitor and run control calculations. View Controls definition - View Control Manager definitions. Edit Controls definition - Configure controls in Administration. Dismiss Blocking Controls - Force failing controls to Dismissed status Reset Control Dismissal - Reset a Dismissed control status to its previous status.


2011

BPC440


Setting Up Controls To use controls, the Entity dimension requires two properties. •

Control_Level - Level of control that should be applied. There are four possible levels: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Basic Standard Advanced Comprehensive Note: These are Logical Identifiers that are used to assign controls to Entities. For example, most Entities may use a Basic control level that checks the balance sheet total. Hwever, some Entities may use a Standard control level that checks the balance sheet total, and if Accounts Payable is less than 10% of Cash. If blank, the default is 4.

•

Ctrl_Currency_Not_LC - Bypass controls in Local Currency (if data is imported in reporting currency) 1. 2.

If N then LC is used If Y the Reporting Currency based on the Currency property value is used. If blank the default is N.

These steps are required to configure controls. • • • • • • •

Assign Security Tasks for Controls Add the two Entity dimension properties Enable Work Status for the Model Enable Controls by Model Create Individual Controls Create Control Sets Assign Control Sets to Category and Time

Controls Configuration In Administration, authorized users can access the Controls area to do configuration. Note: The Models that are enabled are in bold.

2011


529


BPC440

Figure 417: Main Configuration Screen

These are the controls options on the main screen. • • • •

Open - Access the control configuration Edit Sets - Maintain sets Edit Assignments - Assign sets to time and category Enable Controls - Turn on controls by Model

Control IDs If you select Open , you can view a summarized list of Control IDs by Model.

Figure 418: Control IDs

Controls Business Rule In this section you will learn how to configure the business rule. Below is the layout of the Control screen.

530


2011

BPC440


Figure 419: Control Screen Layout

In the header there are settings that control all of the line items for the rule such as whether it is a blocking rule or not.

Figure 420: Control Header 1

Below you can see the Tolerance Threshold settings.

2011


531


BPC440

Figure 421: Control Header 2

Control Field Header Definitions Field

Definition

ID

ID of the rule

Description

Description of the rule

Type

Warning or Blocking. All blocking controls must pass before the work status can be changed.

Equation Type

Type of comparison using the equal, different, larger, and smaller operators

Breakdown Dimension(s)

Select up to two additional dimensions to balance by (Controls will balance by Entity by default).

Control Level

Level of this control, linked to the Control_Level property of the Entity dimension

Threshold Level - in Value

In absolute value

Threshold Level - in %: Reference to Upper Level

Percentage is calculated based on the value of the top level

Threshold Level - in %: Reference to Lower Level

Percentage is calculated based on the value of the bottom level

Note: When a breakdown dimension is chosen, the control will be executed separately for each member of the breakdown dimension. In an example of a breakdown by DataSource on the parent ALL_INPUT, the control will be executed for each child such as INPUT1 and INPUT2. For a breakdown, the same member must be specified in the top and bottom level of the control

532


2011

BPC440


Figure 422: Upper and Lower Levels of a Control

Upper Level Field Definitions Fields

Definition

Sign

+ or -

Account

Member from the Account dimension (parent or base level)

Flow

Member from the Flow dimension (parent or base level)

InterCompany

Member from the Intercompany dimension (parent or base level)

DataSource

Member from the Datasource dimension (parent or base level)

Multiply

Select multiply or divide (for the value specified)

Value

Value to multiply or divide by

Lower Level Field Definitions Fields

Definition

Sign

+ or -

Year Offset

To use a different year. Values can be a year for example (2010) or an offset (+1,-1)

Period

To use a different period. Values can be a period value or an offset (+1,-1)

Remaining fields are the same as in the upper level Document links can be provided for each Control. These will appear as hypertext links for ease of access to root cause data.

2011


533


BPC440

Figure 423: Document for BPC440 Account Totals

Control Sets Controls are assigned to Control Sets and then Control Sets are assigned to time and category members.

Figure 424: Control Set 1

By assigning control sets to category and time you can use different controls for interim months vs. quarter end months for example.

534


2011

BPC440


Figure 425: Control Set Assignment

2011


535


536


BPC440

2011

BPC440

525


Exercise 19: Create Data Control Business Rules Exercise Duration: 70 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure controls • Execute controls • View results from the Controls Monitor

Business Example At various points during the consolidation process, you would like to run some tests to see if your financial statements are in balance. You are interested in checking for the usual assets equal liabilities and owners equity, but you also want to know how to do some additional checks such as retained earnings = annual net income, for example.

Task 1: Configure controls for your Legal model. 1.

Access the Controls area.

2.

Enable controls for the Legal model.

3.

Create a control that compares assets against liabilities and owners equity, as shown below.


2011


537


BPC440

Figure 426: Valid 010 Control

4.

Create a control that compares retained earnings to annual net income, as shown below. This control is for companies that use the Basic control level.


538


2011

BPC440



5.

Link a document to your Valid 020 Control.

6.

Create a control that generates a warning if AP is greater than 10% of Cash, as shown below.


2011


539


BPC440


7.

Link a document to your Valid 030 Control. Users need a link to the Excel report BPC440 Account Totals.

8.

Create Control Set 1 for All Controls.

9.

Create Control Set 2 for the Valid_010 Control.

10. Edit assignments for your control sets. Control_Set_1 is intended for Actuals and Control_Set_2 is for Plan. They will both be run for December 2011.

Task 2: Execute controls 1.

Execute controls and view the results.

2.

Set your context

3.

Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL

Time

2011.12

Consgroup

G_CG1

Execute controls. Continued on next page

540


2011

BPC440


4.

Review the C2000 results.

5.

Verify that your Valid_010 control for C2000 balances.

Task 3: Run controls in an out of balance scenario.

2011

1.

Open the Controls Monitor.

2.

Confirm the successful status for C1000 and the Valid_020 control.

3.

Open the linked document BPC440 Control Test and set your context as shown below. Dimension

Member

Company

C1000 - Germany

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct

Any value is ok

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco


Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

4.

Change retained earnings to 21,000 for C1000.

5.

Execute controls.

6.

Test the block feature on work status changes.

7.

Change retained earnings back to 20,000 for C1000.

8.

Execute controls.

9.

Test the block feature on work status changes.


541


BPC440

Solution 19: Create Data Control Business Rules Task 1: Configure controls for your Legal model. 1.

2.

3.

Access the Controls area. a)


b)

Choose Rules → Controls.

Enable controls for the Legal model. a)

Select Legal.

b)

Choose Enable Controls.

c)

Select Enable Controls for: Legal.

d)

Choose OK.

Create a control that compares assets against liabilities and owners equity, as shown below.


a)

Choose Open → New. Continued on next page

542


2011

BPC440


b)

In the Header section, enter the following values: Field

Value

ID

VALID_010

Description

Assets = Liabilities and Owners Equity

Type

Blocking

Equation Type

=

Control Level

Basic


C_Datasrc

This control is for companies that use the Basic Control Level. The control blocks the changing of a work state if a difference is detected. There is also a balancing check for each data source member, since it is included as a breakdown dimension. c)

d)

e)

On the Expressions tab for row 1 (upper), enter the following data: Fields in Row 1 (upper)

Value

C_ACCT

A

FLOW

F_CB

INTCO

TOTAL

C_DATASRC

TOTALADJ

Multiply

X

Value

1

On the Expressions tab for row 1 (lower), enter the following data: Fields in Row 1 (lower)

Value

C_ACCT

LOE

FLOW

F_CB

INTCO

TOTAL

C_DATASRC

TOTALADJ

Multiply

X

Value

1

Choose Save → Close. Continued on next page

2011


543


4.

BPC440

Create a control that compares retained earnings to annual net income, as shown below. This control is for companies that use the Basic control level.


544


2011

BPC440



a)

Choose New.

b)

In the Header section, enter the following values:

c)

d)

e)

Field

Value

ID

VALID_020

Description

Retained Earnings = Annual Net Income

Type

Blocking

Equation Type

=

Control Level

Basic


C_Datasrc


Value

C_ACCT

257120000

FLOW

F_CB

INTCO

TOTAL

C_DATASRC

TOTALADJ

Multiply

X

Value

1


Value

C_ACCT

39000000

FLOW

F_CB

INTCO

TOTAL

C_DATASRC

TOTALADJ

Multiply

X

Value

1

Choose Save.


2011


545


5.

BPC440

Link a document to your Valid 020 Control. a)

Choose the Documents tab.

b)

Choose Add → Excel Input Schedule.

c)

Choose the Public folder.

d)

Select BPC440 Control Test.

e)

Choose OK → Save → Close. Users can run an Excel Input Schedule when they access the control details.

6.

Create a control that generates a warning if AP is greater than 10% of Cash, as shown below.


a)

Choose New.

b)

In the Header section, enter the following values: Field

Value

ID

VALID_030

Description

AP vs. Cash for Level 2 / Std Companies (C2000)

Type

Warning Continued on next page

546


2011

BPC440


Equation Type

<

Control Level

Basic

Breakdown Dimension(s) This control is for companies that use the Basic control level (2). The control generates a warning if a difference is detected. c)

d)

e)


Value

C_ACCT

21121000

FLOW

F_CB

INTCO

I_NONE

C_DATASRC

TOTALADJ

Multiply

X

Value

1


Value

C_ACCT

11112000

FLOW

F_CB

INTCO

I_NONE

C_DATASRC

TOTALADJ

Multiply

/

Value

10

Fill in your selections as shown above. This control is only for company C2000, since it uses the Standard control level that is assigned to the C2000 member in master data.

f)

Choose Save.


2011


547


7.

BPC440

Link a document to your Valid 030 Control. Users need a link to the Excel report BPC440 Account Totals. a)

Choose the Documents tab.

b)

Choose Add → Excel Report.

c)

Choose the Public folder.

d)

Select BPC440 Account Totals.

e)

Choose OK → Save → Close.

Figure 432: Control IDs for Legal

f)

Choose Return to Controls.


548


2011

BPC440


8.

Create Control Set 1 for All Controls. a)

Under Model, select Legal.

b)

Choose Edit Sets → New.

c)

Next to ID, enter CONTROL_SET_1.

d)

Next to Description, enter All Controls.

e)

Choose Add / Remove.

f)

In Available Controls, move all three to Selected Controls.

g)

Choose OK → Save.


h)

Choose Close.

i)

Choose Return to Controls.


2011


549


9.

BPC440

Create Control Set 2 for the Valid_010 Control. a)

Choose New.

b)

Next to ID, enter CONTROL_SET_2.

c)

Next to Description, enter Assets Liabilities and Owners Equity Only.

d)

Choose Add / Remove.

e)

In Available Controls, move the Valid_010 control to Selected Controls.

f)

Choose OK → Save.


g)

Choose Close → Return to Controls


550


2011

BPC440


10. Edit assignments for your control sets. Control_Set_1 is intended for Actuals and Control_Set_2 is for Plan. They will both be run for December 2011. a)

Select Legal and choose Edit Assignments.

b)

Choose C_Category and select Actual and Plan.

c)

Choose OK.

d)

Choose Time and select 2011.12.

e)

Choose OK.

f)

Choose Edit.

g)

At the intersection of Actual and 2011.12, double-click and then single left click. The dropdown list appears.

h)

Select Control_Set_1.

i)

At the intersection of Plan and 2011.12, double-click and then single left click.

j)

Select Control_Set_2.

Figure 435: Assignments: Legal

k)

Choose Save → Close → Return to Controls.

Task 2: Execute controls 1.

2.

Execute controls and view the results. a)

On the Home tab, choose Consolidation Central → Controls Monitor.

b)

Next to Model, select Legal.

Set your context Continued on next page

2011


551


BPC440

Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL

Time

2011.12

Consgroup

G_CG1

a)

Left click the context members to call the dropdown list and make your selections as shown above.


3.

Execute controls. a)

Select G_CG1 and choose Run Controls.

b)

Use the following selections:

c)

Dimension

Member

C_Category

ACTUAL

Time

2011.12

Consgroup

G_CG1

Choose OK. You should have a status of Passed or Passed with Warnings.


552


2011

BPC440


4.

Review the C2000 results. a)

Select C2000. Note the details for the failed control lower in the monitor.

b)

Choose Open Controls Results. The Control Results tab opens for C2000.

c)

Choose the Valid_030 control.

d)

In Documents for Valid_030, choose BPC440 Account Totals.

Figure 437: Threshold Control Results

The Excel interface of the EPM add-in session opens with the selected template. The context menu is on the Business Process Flow tab. e)

Close the EPM add-in.

f)

Return to the Control Results tab.


2011


553


5.

BPC440

Verify that your Valid_010 control for C2000 balances. a)

Expand the Valid_010 control.

b)

Scroll down to the Input member.

Figure 438: C2000 Valid_010 Results

You can see a balanced comparison for assets = liability and owners equity of 127,923.

Task 3: Run controls in an out of balance scenario. 1.

2.

Open the Controls Monitor. a)

In the Web client, choose the Home tab.

b)

Go to Consolidation Central → Controls Monitor.

Confirm the successful status for C1000 and the Valid_020 control. a)

Select C1000 and choose Open Controls Results. The Controls Results tab opens.

b)

Under Control, open Valid_020 and scroll down to the Breakdown Member 1 value of Input. You should find that retained earnings of 20,000 is equal to annual net income of 20,000.

3.

Open the linked document BPC440 Control Test and set your context as shown below. Dimension

Member

Company

C1000 - Germany

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

C_Acct

Any value is ok Continued on next page

554


2011

BPC440


C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

C_Datasrc


Flow


Intco


Rptcurrency

LC - Local currency

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Measure

YTD - Year to Date

a)

In Documents for: Valid_020, choose BPC440 Control Test. The EPM add-in opens.

4.

b)

Set your EPM context as shown above.

c)

Select the EPM tab and choose Refresh.

Change retained earnings to 21,000 for C1000. a)

Next to Retained Earnings, enter 21,000.

b)

Choose Save Data. The EPM - Submit Data dialog opens.

c)

Choose Yes. The Save Results dialog opens.

d) 5.

Choose OK.


In the Web client, go to the Home tab.

b)

Close any existing Control Results tabs.

c)

In the Controls Monitor, select G_CG1.

d)

Choose Run Controls → OK. C1000 fails both the AR=ANI and the Assets=Liabilities+Owners Equity control.

e)

Select C1000 and choose Open Controls Results. The Controls Results tab opens.

f)

Under Control, open Valid_020 and scroll down to the Breakdown Member 1 value of Input. You should find that retained earnings is 21,000 vs. annual net income of 20,000. Continued on next page

2011


555


6.

BPC440

Test the block feature on work status changes. a)

In the Consolidation Monitor, choose C1000.

b)

Choose Work Status. The Work Status dialog appears for C1000, Actual, 2011.12. Hint: Set the dimension members to C1000, Actual, 2011.12, if necessary.

c)

Next to New Status, choose Submitted → Apply. You should receive the error Failed in checking status in control.

d) 7.

Select Close.

Change retained earnings back to 20,000 for C1000. a)

In the EPM add-in, next to Retained Earnings, enter 20,000.

b)

Choose Save Data. The EPM - Submit Data dialog opens.

c)

Choose Yes. The Save Results dialog opens.

d) 8.

Choose OK.


In the Web client, go to the Home tab.

b)

In the Controls Monitor, select G_CG1.

c)

Choose Run Controls → OK. C1000 passes both the AR=ANI and the Assets=Liabilities+Owners Equity control.


556


2011

BPC440


9.

Test the block feature on work status changes. a)

In the Consolidation Monitor, choose C1000.

b)

Choose Work Status. The Work Status dialog appears. Hint: Set the dimension members to C1000, Actual, 2011.12, if necessary.

c)

Next to New Status, choose Submitted → Apply. You should receive the message Work status was changed to Submitted.

d)

2011

Choose Close.


557


BPC440

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Define controls, control sets, and assignments • Execute controls from the monitor • Explain the status information displayed • Use linked documents to easily access root cause information

558


2011

BPC440

Lesson: 547

Lesson: Creating Consolidation Business Process Flows

Creating Consolidation Business Process Flows Lesson Duration: 55 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to create Business Process Flows.


Create a Business Process Flow Run a Business Process Flow

Our main goal in this lesson is to teach how to use a Business Process Flows in a consolidation or planning scenario.

Business Example You are considering the use of a Business Process Flow on your project to help coordinate the process , so you need to know how to build and use it.

Key Features of Business Process Flows To decide whether to use a Business Process Flow, you need to know what the benefits are as well as the cost to implement and maintain. The Benefits and Costs of Business Process Flows are shown below: •

Benefits: – – – – – – – – –

2011

Helps with coordination Web based user interface / launchpad Status and tracking Guided navigation E-mail notifications Steps can be reopened Steps can be reviewed by higher authorities Built in Monitor Delivered detailed reports


559


•

BPC440

– Work Status integration – Real time simulations in build mode – Users can save workspaces during execution Costs: – – – –

Has to be designed and configured Has to be maintained Has to be supported by the help desk Users cannot be forced to use the business process flow user interface

Key Terms • • • • • • • • •

Process Template - A sequential grouping of activities to complete a process Activities - The activities for which the logged on user can perform Activity Regions - The members that an activity is executed by Process Instance - An iteration of a business process flow template that is in active use Process monitor - Users who can monitor the instances of a template Performer - User(s) or team assigned to an entity member for example. Performers can complete or submit (for approval) activities. Reviewer - User(s) or team assigned to an entity member for example. Reviewers can approve or reject submitted activities. Workspace - A tab in the Web Interface with links to activities Hyperlink - A link in a workspace that contains actions such as Upload File.

Business Process Flow Activities In this section you will learn how to use Activities. On the Home tab, go to Activities. The upper area includes all processes that you are involved in. The lower area renders the activities for that process. Note: By choosing an activity, you can use the Actions button to change the status to Complete for example.

560


2011

BPC440


Figure 439: Activities in Run Mode

Demonstration: Demo a BPF in run mode Purpose show how the users can easily navigate to their activities and set statuses

System Data System: Client: User ID: Password: Set up instructions: Use the bpc430_master environment 1. If you need to, refer to the solutions.

Running Business Process Flows When an activity is chosen, a separate workspace tab is opened. You can see an example below.

2011


561


BPC440

In the Business Process Flow side panel, you can see all the related hyperlinks. This makes users’ work easier as they can perform the same type of actions without going back to their activity workspace. Note: Each workspace has its own context. The context below is set to Budget, 2010, and Total. The workspace context can be used as a default data selection for all of the hyperlinks in the workspace.

Figure 440: Data Manager Workspace

When an EPM add-in activity is selected, a special Business Process Flow pane opens up as you can see below. This special pane includes related actions that you can easily build into the workspace. There is also a pushbutton that can be used to return to the Activity Workspace.

562


2011

BPC440


Figure 441: The Excel Interface of the EPM add-in Action Pane

Business Process Flow Statuses To be able to use a Business Process Flow you need to be familiar with all of the possible statuses. Status

Resulting Status

To Be Performed

Waiting for completion or waiting to be submitted

Submitted

Action has been submitted and the activity is waiting for review

Completed

Activity is fully completed

Reopened

Completed activity has been reopened.

Pending

Activity is waiting for a predecessor activity to be completed. It is not possible to take any actions on pending activities.

Rejected

A reviewer has rejected an activity, the activity is open again for user action

Delayed

Completion of the activity has been delayed due to the predecessor activity being reopened. It is not possible to take any actions on delayed activity.

Note: The Performer of an activity is the person responsible for completing the activity. The reviewer is the person who must verify the actions taken by the Performer in a particular activity context. Performers and reviewers can be individuals or made up of a team. Two or more users can select the same activity concurrently, as multiple users may be involved in the completion of one activity. Opening Criteria allows you to either force all the participants (activity regions) of an activity to be completed before anyone can proceed, or allow a participant (activity region) to proceed to the next activity, even if everyone is not complete yet. For example, in the shaded activity below, Europe must wait for the US if using the Opening Criteria: All If the Opening Criteria is Matched however, then Europe can proceed.

2011


563


BPC440

Opening Criteria Activity

Activity Region

Opening Criteria: All

Opening Criteria: Matched

Import actual data

Europe

Complete

Complete

US

Complete

Complete

Run Controls

Europe

Complete

Complete

US

To Be Performed

To Be Performed

Run Currency Translation

Europe

Pending

To Be Performed

US

Pending

Pending

Book Manual Journal Entries

Europe

Pending

Pending

US

Pending

Pending

Below you can see the completed status for the activities of a process template.

Figure 442: Completed Activities

Creating Process Templates A process template describes a monthly activity, such as line managers entering monthly budget data. Note: Separate templates would be needed when you have two totally different processes. For example, a corporation may have one planning business process flow and one closing business process flow. Below you can see how the business process flow components are related.

564


2011

BPC440


Figure 443: Process Template Components

In this section you will learn how to create a Process Template. The Process Settings contain the general properties of the template.

Figure 444: Business Process Flow - Process Settings

2011


565


BPC440

Process Settings Fields Field

Definition

Name

This will be the name of the process

Description

A brief description of the process

Model

The model governs both the dimensions that can make up the process instance and the available dimensions for the activity context.

Dimensions

The dimensions that make up the instances are defined here

Process Monitors

This user can monitor all the instances created for this template

Creating Business Process Flow Activities The activities will be used to track the progress of the process.

Figure 445: Activities

The activity settings provide instructions to the users and also control the behavior of the activity.

566


2011

BPC440


Figure 446: Activity Settings

Activity Fields

2011

Field

Definition

Name

Provide a title for the activity.

Instruction

Provide a description of what is to be done in the activity. This is the instruction that is displayed to a user performing an activity.

Driving dimension

This dimension is used to determine the granularity of the activity and to determine the Performers. For example, if you want to run an activity once per region, use the Entity dimension because it has a hierarchy by region.

Members

Select the members of the Driving Dimension. For example, choose the US parent so that its children (regions) will determine the granularity of the activity.

Performer

Select the property that defines the performer for each member of the Driving Dimension. You can select the Owner property or any other property for this.

Require Reviewer

To require that a reviewer must approve or reject the action


567


BPC440

Reviewer

Select the property that defines the Reviewer for each member of the Driving Dimension. You can select the Reviewer property or any other property

Opening Criteria

Choose either All activity contexts or Matched activity contexts.

Allow Reopen

To allow authorized users to reopen an activity, select the Yes radio button.

Creating Business Process Flow Workspaces Workspaces will contain the groups of related hyperlinks for the users. For example, when using automatic planning functions, you might copy actual to plan, revalue the data, then run a comparison report.

Figure 447: Planning Functions Workspace

There are 3 ways to add contents to the Activity Workspace. 1. 2. 3.

568

Add Hyperlinks: Refer to the section below for more information. Add Content: You can embed existing web contents (Report, Input form, Workspace) into the Activity Workspace. Add New Report: Using this, you can create a new report from scratch.


2011

BPC440


Adding Hyperlinks 557

1.

Add new hyperlinks by clicking the Add Hyperlinks button. A new hyperlinks view is added in the left side panel, and in the main canvas, a new Hyperlink is added.

2.

Set the properties in the Edit Hyperlink pane on the right-hand side.

3.

Click the Browse button to navigate to a desired report for example.

4.

Click the Save button to save the hyperlink.

5.

Save the Process Template.

Creating Business Process Flow Hyperlinks Hyperlinks contain the actions, model, context, and related actions.

Figure 448: Upload File Hyperlink

Note: You can simulate hyperlinks at Design-time. Click Stop Editing, then the hyperlink becomes available just like at runtime.

Creating Business Process Flow Related Actions Related actions result in hyperlinks for the user that provide guided navigation for activities. For example, after importing a file, you might want to Preview it.

2011


569


BPC440

Figure 449: Upload File - Related Action

Template Version Management Business process flow templates are managed using version information. There are three types of versions available in Business Process Flow Templates: 1. 2.

Draft - Draft is set by default for a new process template. This version can be edited and deleted. Deployed - Templates in Draft status can be Deployed. Then you can create an Instance for it. When the template is in Deployed status, users cannot make changes to the template. This version can’t be Archived either.

3.

Inactive - Inactive versions are not available to users. Note: Template versions may have: 1. 2. 3.

Only 1 Draft version for any given template Only 1 Deployed version for a given template Multiple Inactive versions for a given template

Creating Business Process Flow Instances A process template describes a monthly activity, such as cost center managers entering monthly budget data. Each month would be a separate instance. One user will be chosen as the Performer of the process instance. That user has the right to finalize the process instance.

570


2011

BPC440


These are the steps included in the Wizard when you create an instance: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select the Process - The related activities appear on the right Select the Owner - The Owner can finalize the instance for example Select the Context - Choose the members for the Instance Context such as 2012 Budget Check Assignments - Maintain the Performer and Reviewer assignments if necessary Review and Start - Review the instance metadata. Select Start the Process Instance to create the instance in Running status upon completion.

Figure 450: Creating an Instance

Note: The instance takes a snapshot of the template. If you make changes to the template, only new instances created after that point will include the revisions. Note: The process instance is unique from the template once generated. Any changes to the template definition do NOT impact previously generated process Instances.

2011


571


BPC440

After an instance is created, these are the activities that are available. • • • • • •

Start - To start a process Instance Suspend / resume - Suspended instances are not available to users. Change Assignment - Process Owner and Activity Owners can be changed by selecting the Change Assignment option Reset - To reset an instance back to the first activity Archive - To archive finalized or inactive instances. An archived process does is not available for users. Finalize - You can finalize a process instance if you are the process instance owner Note: Archived instances can be reported on if Audit of Business Process Flow Activity is turned on. Audit reports are available in the Home tab under Audit. Run the Administration Activity report.

E-mail Notification E-mails are generated when: • • •

Process monitors receive an e-mail notification when a new process instance is created, suspended, resumed, reset, ready to be finalized, and archived. The owner of an activity receives an e-mail notification when the activity is open to perform, approved/rejected by reviewer, and reopened. The responsible reviewer for an activity receives an e-mail notification when the activity is ready for review. Note: SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Version for the NetWeaver Platform contains a number of e-mail templates by default. These are S-type (system) templates, which cannot be modified. But a copy of each system template can be created and customized according to the business needs. These are C-type (customized) templates.

The program used to generate emails is: UJB_MAINTAIN_EMAIL_TMPL. The table where the templates are stored is: UJB_EMAIL10 - BPC: Business Process Flow E-mail Template Table. New e-mail templates can be created via the SMARTFORM transaction code. Below is an example of the information contained in an e-mail.

572


2011

BPC440


It includes the following: • • • • •

The Process The Context Then action, such as: The following activity has been reopened. The activity and the owner A link to the activity

Figure 451: A Sample E-mail

Integration If you decide to use business process flows, you should also consider how they interact with security and work status. Users’ activities in the business process flow guide them to tasks that need to be performed and data that needs to be viewed or changed. Therefore, the users need to have the relevant task profile to carry out their assigned activities. They also need to have access to the relevant data via Data Access Profiles. In addition, by including work status in the business process flow, users will be able to flexibly control data access at appropriate points in the process. Note: The illustration below is conceptual. In the example below, the entity dimension is used to determine the owners, reviewers, and managers for Store1. So for Store1, Joe is the owner, Nicole is the reviewer, and Pete is the Manager. The User Actions are the sequence of activities in this example. When Joe submits Step 4, Nicole is notified via e-mail and she approves it.

2011


573


BPC440

Since Pete is the manager of Store1, he can set the work state to Reviewed and then Approved. If the work state is Reviewed for example, no one can run a Data Manager package for that data region since it is Locked. The work state options are defined as follows. • • • •

All - All users are allowed to perform the activity Locked - Users are Locked out of that activity Owner - Only the Owner can perform the activity Manager - Only the Manager can perform the activity

Status Controlled By determines who can change the work state. In the example below, the Manager can advance the work state to Approved and back to Reviewed. The Work status interfaces are the user interfaces available to save data or documents to the database. They are defined as follows: • • • • •

574

Data Manager - running Data Manager packages Journals - posting journal entries Manual - manually entering and saving data Documents - posting document attachments Comments - saving comments to the database


2011

BPC440


Figure 452: Security, Work Status, Business Process Flow Integration Concept

Note: Pete is the implied manager of Store1 since he is the owner of the parent (US) of Store1.

2011


575


576


BPC440

2011

BPC440

565


Exercise 20: Create a Business Process Flow for Consolidation Exercise Duration: 90 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and run a business process flow

Business Example You need to create a business process flow for your consolidation process.

Task 1: Create a process template. 1.

Call Process Templates in Administration.

2.

Create a new template with the Name and Description of Consolidation. Complete the Process Settings as shown below. Hint: For the Users, select the Role (team) of Administrator Team for SAP BPC.

Figure 453: BPF - Process Settings


2011


577


3.

BPC440

Create the Import Actuals activity as shown below. Allow reopening. Note: The Investments Company member ID is H1.

Figure 454: Import Actuals Settings

4.

Create the remaining four activities as you see below. Hint: Use the context menu to duplicate one activity to the next.


578


2011

BPC440



5.

Require a reviewer for the Journals activity.

Task 2: Create the Import Actuals workspace. 1.

Create a Performer workspace. Hint: Page down to Workspaces.

2.

Create the Upload File hyperlink as shown below. Include a related action to preview the file. Fields

Values

Name and Description

Upload File

Description

Upload Flat File

Target Action

Data Manager → Data Upload

Model

Legal Model

Name of Related Action

Preview

Related Action to Perform Data Manager → Data Preview


2011


579


BPC440


3.

Add the values below to the existing hyperlink. Include a related action to View Package Status. Fields

Values


Import

Target Action

Data Manager → Run User Package

Model

Legal Model


Check Status

Related Action to Perform Data Manager → View Package Status 4.

Rename your hyperlink Upload and Import. Import Note: You may have different dimension members in your context. However, the context is irrelevant for Data Manager activities.


580


2011

BPC440


Figure 457: Import Actuals Workspace

5.

Save your process template.

Task 3: Create the Controls workspace. 1.

Create a Performer Workspace.

2.

Create the Summary hyperlink as shown below. Hint: Use the + symbol to Add All Dimensions into your hyperlink.

3.

Fields

Values


Summary

Target Action

Consolidation → Open Controls Summary

Model

Legal Model

Context Members

Actual, 11-Dec, Corporate (ID = G_CG1 in the Consgroup dimension)

Under Summary, add the Detail hyperlink with the values below. Continued on next page

2011


581


4.

BPC440

Fields

Values


Detail

Target Action

Consolidation→ Open controls details

Model

Legal Model

Context Members

Actual, 11-Dec, Corporate (Consgroup)

Rename your hyperlink Controls.


5.

Save your process step.

6.


Task 4: Create the Journals workspace. 1.


2.

Create the Journal Summary hyperlink as shown below.

3.

Fields

Values


Journal Summary

Target Action

Consolidation → Open journal list

Model

Legal Model

Below Journal Summary, add the Create New Journal hyperlink with the values below.


582


2011

BPC440


4.

Fields

Values


Create New Journal

Target Action

Consolidation→ Create a new journal

Model

Legal Model

Rename your hyperlink Journals so that it appears as follows:

Figure 459: Journals Workspace

5.


6.


Task 5: Create the Ownership Manager workspace. 1.


2.

Create the Open Ownership Manager hyperlink as shown below.

3.

Fields

Values


Open Ownership Manager

Target Action

Consolidation → Open ownership manager

Model

Legal Model

Context Members


Rename your hyperlink Ownership Manager so that it appears as follows: Continued on next page

2011


583


BPC440

Figure 460: Ownership Manager Workspace

4.


5.


Task 6: Create the Consolidation Monitor workspace. 1.


2.

Create the Open Consolidation Monitor hyperlink as shown below.

3.

Fields

Values


Open Consolidation Monitor

Target Action

Consolidation → Open consolidation monitor

Model

Legal Model

Context Members


Rename your hyperlink Consolidation Monitor so that it appears as follows:


584


2011

BPC440


Figure 461: Consolidation Monitor Workspace

4.


5.


6.

Deploy the process template.

Task 7: Create the process instance. 1.

Create a process instance for your process template.

Task 8: Execute your activities. 1.

Access your activities in the Home workspace.

2.

Open the Import Actuals workspace.

3.

Close the Data Manager - Upload action since we are only testing.

4.

Complete the Import Actuals activity and return to your activities.

5.

Open the Controls workspace and launch the Summary hyperlink.

6.

Test the Detail hyperlink.

7.

Complete the Controls activity.

8.

Open the Journals workspace and launch the Journal Summary hyperlink.

9.

Test the Create New Journal hyperlink from the Journals tab.

10. Submit the Journals activity and return to your activities. 11. Approve journals. 12. Complete the Ownership Manager and Consolidation Monitor activities. Continued on next page

2011


585


BPC440

13. Run the process monitor. 14. Finalize the process.

586


2011

BPC440


Solution 20: Create a Business Process Flow for Consolidation Task 1: Create a process template. 1.

2.

Call Process Templates in Administration. a)

In the Web client, go to the Home tab on the Start Page.

b)

Choose Planning and Consolidation Administration.

c)

Choose Business Process Flows → Process Templates.

Create a new template with the Name and Description of Consolidation. Complete the Process Settings as shown below. Hint: For the Users, select the Role (team) of Administrator Team for SAP BPC.

Figure 462: BPF - Process Settings

a) 3.

Choose New and complete your settings as shown above.

Create the Import Actuals activity as shown below. Allow reopening. Note: The Investments Company member ID is H1.


2011


587


BPC440

Figure 463: Import Actuals Settings

4.

a)

Go to the Activities tab.

b)

Under Process Settings, choose New.

c)

Enter Import Actuals as the Name and Instruction.

d)

Create the rest of the settings as shown above.

Create the remaining four activities as you see below. Hint: Use the context menu to duplicate one activity to the next.


588


2011

BPC440



5.

a)

Under Process Settings, select Import Actuals, left click the context menu and choose Duplicate → Duplicate activity definition and context → OK.

b)

Repeat three more times.

c)

Change the Name and Instruction for the second activity to Controls.

d)

Change the Name and Instruction for the third activity to Journals.

e)

Change the Name and Instruction for the fourth activity to Ownership Manager.

f)

Change the Name and Instruction for the fifth activity to Consolidation Monitor.

Require a reviewer for the Journals activity. a)

Choose Journals and select Require Reviewer.

b)

Next to Reviewer, select Reviewer from the dropdown list.

c)

Choose Save. The template is saved and you are on the Process Settings tab.

d)

Choose the Activities tab.


2011


589


BPC440

Task 2: Create the Import Actuals workspace. 1.

Create a Performer workspace. Hint: Page down to Workspaces. a)

Choose the Import Actuals activity.

b)

In Workspaces, choose Create. A tab called Import Actuals is opened.

2.

Create the Upload File hyperlink as shown below. Include a related action to preview the file. Fields

Values


Upload File

Description

Upload Flat File

Target Action

Data Manager → Data Upload

Model

Legal Model


Preview

Related Action to Perform Data Manager → Data Preview


590


2011

BPC440



a)

On the upper right, choose Add Hyperlinks. Edit Hyperlink appears on the right.

b)

Enter Upload File as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Data Manager → Data Upload.

d)

Next to Model, select Legal Model.

e)

Under Related Actions, choose Edit. The Related Actions dialog appears.

f)

Choose New. A related action is created.

g)

Under New, select Related Action.

h)

Next to Name of Related Action, enter Preview.

i)

Under Action to perform when users choose this hyperlink, select Data Manager.

j)

Under Data Manager, select Data Preview.

Figure 466: Upload File - Related Action

k) 3.

Choose OK.

Add the values below to the existing hyperlink. Include a related action to View Package Status. Fields

Values


Import

Target Action

Data Manager → Run User Package


2011


591


Model

Legal Model


Check Status

BPC440

Related Action to Perform Data Manager → View Package Status a)

Choose Add. Edit Hyperlink appears on the right.

b)

Enter Import as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Data Manager → Run user package.

d)


e)

Under Related Actions, choose Edit. The Related Actions dialog appears.

f)

Choose New. A related action is created.

4.

g)

Under New, select Related Action.

h)

Next to Name of Related Action, enter Check Status.

i)

Under Action to perform when users choose this hyperlink, select Data Manager.

j)

Under Data Manager, select View Package Status.

k)

Choose OK.

Rename your hyperlink Upload and Import. Import Note: You may have different dimension members in your context. However, the context is irrelevant for Data Manager activities.


592


2011

BPC440



a)

Beneath Overview, hover over the hyperlink. The options box appears.

b)

Left click Options. The context menu appears.

5.

c)

Choose Rename. Enter Upload and Import.

d)

Choose Save.

e)

In the message box, you will see Workspace has been saved.

f)

Choose OK.

g)

Close the Import Actuals tab.

Save your process template. a)

Choose Save. Go back to the Activities tab.


2011


593


BPC440

Task 3: Create the Controls workspace. 1.

2.

Create a Performer Workspace. a)

Under Import Actuals, choose Controls.

b)

Under Workspaces, choose Create.

Create the Summary hyperlink as shown below. Hint: Use the + symbol to Add All Dimensions into your hyperlink. Fields

Values


Summary

Target Action

Consolidation → Open Controls Summary

Model

Legal Model

Context Members

Actual, 11-Dec, Corporate (ID = G_CG1 in the Consgroup dimension)

a)

Choose Add Hyperlinks. Edit Hyperlink appears on the right.

b)

Enter Summary as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Consolidation → Open Controls Summary.

d)


e)

Choose the + symbol and Add All Dimensions.

f)

Set your workspace context to Actual, 11-Dec and Corporate consgroup member.

Figure 468: Controls Context


594


2011

BPC440


3.

Under Summary, add the Detail hyperlink with the values below. Fields

Values


Detail

Target Action

Consolidation→ Open controls details

Model

Legal Model

Context Members


a)

Next to Validate, choose Add. Edit Hyperlink appears on the right.

4.

b)

Enter Detail as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Consolidation → Open controls details.

d)


Rename your hyperlink Controls.


a)

Beneath Overview, hover over the first hyperlink. The options box appears.

b)


c)

Select Rename and enter Controls.


2011


595


5.

6.

BPC440

Save your process step. a)

Choose Save.

b)


c)

Choose OK.

d)

Close the Controls tab.


Choose Save and go back to the Activities tab.

Task 4: Create the Journals workspace. 1.

2.


Under Controls, select Journals.

b)


Create the Journal Summary hyperlink as shown below.


596


2011

BPC440


Fields

Values


Journal Summary

Target Action

Consolidation → Open journal list

Model

Legal Model

a)


b)

Enter Journal Summary as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Consolidation → Open journal list.

d)


e)

Select the + symbol and Add All Dimensions.

f)

Set your workspace context as shown below. Dimension

Context Member ID and Description

C_Category

ACTUAL - Actual

Time

2011.12 - 11-Dec

Rptcurrency

USD - US Dollar

Consgroup

G_NONE - G None

Intco


C_Datasrc


Note: The remaining dimensions are in the journal line items and for that reason will not be included in the journal context. 3.

Below Journal Summary, add the Create New Journal hyperlink with the values below.


2011


597


BPC440

Fields

Values


Create New Journal

Target Action

Consolidation→ Create a new journal

Model

Legal Model

a)

Next to Validate, choose Add. Edit Hyperlink appears on the right.

4.

b)

Enter Create New Journal as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Consolidation → Create a new journal.

d)

Select the Legal model.

Rename your hyperlink Journals so that it appears as follows:

Figure 470: Journals Workspace

5.

a)

Beneath Overview, hover over the first hyperlink.

b)

Left click Options.

c)

Select Rename and enter Journals.


Choose Save.

b)


c)

Choose OK.

d)

Close the Journals tab. Continued on next page

598


2011

BPC440


6.



Task 5: Create the Ownership Manager workspace. 1.

2.

3.


Under Journals, choose Ownership.

b)


Create the Open Ownership Manager hyperlink as shown below. Fields

Values


Open Ownership Manager

Target Action

Consolidation → Open ownership manager

Model

Legal Model

Context Members


a)

On the upper right, choose Add Hyperlinks.

b)

Enter Open Ownership Manager as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Consolidation → Open ownership manager.

d)

Select Legal Model.

e)

Select the + symbol and choose Add All Dimensions.

f)

Set your workspace context as shown above.

Rename your hyperlink Ownership Manager so that it appears as follows:


2011


599


BPC440

Figure 471: Ownership Manager Workspace

4.

5.

a)

Beneath Overview, hover over the first hyperlink.

b)

Left click Options.

c)

Select Rename and enterOwnership Manager.


Choose Save.

b)


c)

Choose OK.

d)

Close the Ownership tab.



Task 6: Create the Consolidation Monitor workspace. 1.

2.


Under Ownership, select Consolidation Monitor.

b)


Create the Open Consolidation Monitor hyperlink as shown below.


600


2011

BPC440


Fields

Values


Open Consolidation Monitor

Target Action

Consolidation → Open consolidation monitor

Model

Legal Model

Context Members


a)


3.

b)

Enter Open consolidation monitor as the Name and Description.

c)

Select a Target Action of Consolidation → Open consolidation monitor.

d)

Select the Legal Model.

e)

Select the + symbol and choose Add All Dimensions.

f)

Set your workspace context as shown above.

Rename your hyperlink Consolidation Monitor so that it appears as follows:

Figure 472: Consolidation Monitor Workspace

a)

Beneath Overview, hover over the first hyperlink. The options box appears.

b)


c)

Select Rename and enter Consolidation Monitor.


2011


601


4.

5.

BPC440


Choose Save.

b)


c)

Choose OK.

d)

Close the Consolidation Monitor tab.


Choose Save → Close. Your template is complete.

6.

Deploy the process template. a)

Select your process template and choose Deploy. Now an instance can be created for the template.


602


2011

BPC440


Task 7: Create the process instance. 1.

Create a process instance for your process template. a)

Under Process Templates, choose Process Instances.

b)

Choose New.

c)

Select your process. Your 5 activities appear.

d)

Choose Next. The owner must be selected.

e)

Next to Name, select BPC-## from the dropdown list.

f)

Choose Next.

g)

Select Actual and 11-Dec as the member IDs.

h)

Choose Next. The Check Assignments step is reached.

i)

Choose Next.

j)

Select Start the process instance. The instance will be activated upon completion.

k)

Choose Finish → Close. The instance is created with the status Running. Caution: The instance creates a snapshot of the template. If you find that you need to make changes to the template, you will need to suspend it, archive it, and then create a new instance.


2011


603


BPC440

Task 8: Execute your activities. 1.

Access your activities in the Home workspace. a)

Go to the Home tab and choose Activities.

b)

Under Process, choose the Consolidation process.

Figure 473: Activities in Run Mode

2.

Open the Import Actuals workspace. a)

Under Details: Consolidation - Actual 11-Dec, choose Import Actuals. The Import Actuals tab opens.

b)

Choose Upload File. The EPM add-in opens and the Data Manager - Upload dialog appears.

3.

4.

Close the Data Manager - Upload action since we are only testing. a)

Choose Cancel.

b)

Return to the Web client.

Complete the Import Actuals activity and return to your activities. a)

Under Import Actuals - Investments, choose Complete. The Status changes to Completed.

b)

Close the Workspace tab

c)

Go to the Home tab and choose Activities. Continued on next page

604


2011

BPC440


5.

Open the Controls workspace and launch the Summary hyperlink. a)

Select Controls. The Controls tab is created.

b)

Choose Summary. The Controls Monitor appears in a new tab.

c) 6.

7.

Close the Summary workspace. When prompted to save data, choose No.

Test the Detail hyperlink. a)

From the Controls tab, choose Detail.

b)

Close the Detail workspace. When prompted to save data, choose No.

Complete the Controls activity. a)

On the Controls tab, choose Complete. The Status changes to Completed.

b) 8.

Close the Controls workspace and return to Activities.

Open the Journals workspace and launch the Journal Summary hyperlink. a)

Choose the Journals activity. The Journals tab opens.

b)

Choose Journal Summary. The system opens the Journals Summary tab.

c) 9.

Close the tab.

Test the Create New Journal hyperlink from the Journals tab. a)

From the Journals tab, choose Create New Journal.

b)

Close the New Journal workspace. When prompted to save data, choose No.

10. Submit the Journals activity and return to your activities. a)

On the Journals tab, choose Submit. The status changes to Submitted.

b)

Close the Journals tab and return to your Activities.


2011


605


BPC440

11. Approve journals. a)

Select the row for Journals.

b)

Choose Actions.

c)

Choose Approve. The Journals status changes to Completed and the next activity is Open.

12. Complete the Ownership Manager and Consolidation Monitor activities. a)

Select Ownership and choose Actions → Complete.

b)

Select Consolidation Monitor and choose Actions → Complete.

Figure 474: Completed Activities

13. Run the process monitor. a)

Under Activities, choose Process Monitor.

b)

Choose Consolidation.

c)

Close the Workspace tab after viewing and return to the Process Monitor.

14. Finalize the process. a)

Select Consolidation and choose Finalize. The instance is now finalized.

606


2011

BPC440


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a Business Process Flow • Run a Business Process Flow

2011


607

Unit Summary

BPC440

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Define controls, control sets, and assignments • Execute controls from the monitor • Explain the status information displayed • Use linked documents to easily access root cause information • Create a Business Process Flow • Run a Business Process Flow

608


2011

BPC440

Course Summary

Course Summary You should now be able to: • • • • • • • • •

2011

Set up the Dimensions and Models Prepare the dimension properties Collect the transaction data Configure balance carry forward and reclassification Set up and test journal templates Configure currency translation Use data controls Configure elimination business rules Report and analyze the data during and after the process


609

Course Summary

610

BPC440


2011

Glossary Model A Model is a functional unit used for a particular purpose, such as Finance or Sales.

2011


611

Glossary

612

BPC440


2011

Index T Time Dimension, 89

2011


613

Index

614

BPC440


2011

Feedback SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.

2011


615

Bpc440 en Col96 Fv Inst a4

Recommend Documents